Mercurial > emacs
annotate doc/misc/texinfo.tex @ 106508:8c836ea59444
* net/tramp.el (tramp-handle-insert-directory): Suppress error messages.
author | Michael Albinus <michael.albinus@gmx.de> |
---|---|
date | Wed, 09 Dec 2009 10:23:00 +0000 |
parents | 881d56e9c3b5 |
children | 01442958b949 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
84318 | 1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2 % |
84318 | 3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. |
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | |
5 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6 \def\texinfoversion{2009-08-14.15} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8 % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, |
84318 | 9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
10 % 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
11 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or |
84318 | 13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
14 % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
15 % License, or (at your option) any later version. |
84318 | 16 % |
17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | |
18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | |
19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU | |
20 % General Public License for more details. | |
21 % | |
22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
23 % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
84318 | 24 % |
25 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing | |
26 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | |
27 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | |
28 % | |
29 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | |
30 % reports; you can get the latest version from: | |
31 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or | |
32 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex | |
33 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). | |
34 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | |
35 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. | |
36 % | |
37 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a | |
38 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | |
39 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | |
40 % | |
41 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | |
42 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple | |
43 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | |
44 % tex foo.texi | |
45 % texindex foo.?? | |
46 % tex foo.texi | |
47 % tex foo.texi | |
48 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. | |
49 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | |
50 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more | |
51 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | |
52 % | |
53 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some | |
54 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the | |
55 % full Texinfo distribution. | |
56 % | |
57 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. | |
58 | |
59 | |
60 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | |
61 | |
62 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | |
63 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | |
64 % they might have appeared in the input file name. | |
65 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | |
66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | |
67 | |
68 | |
69 \chardef\other=12 | |
70 | |
71 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | |
72 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | |
73 \let\+ = \relax | |
74 | |
75 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. | |
76 \let\ptexb=\b | |
77 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | |
78 \let\ptexc=\c | |
79 \let\ptexcomma=\, | |
80 \let\ptexdot=\. | |
81 \let\ptexdots=\dots | |
82 \let\ptexend=\end | |
83 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | |
84 \let\ptexexclam=\! | |
85 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote | |
86 \let\ptexgtr=> | |
87 \let\ptexhat=^ | |
88 \let\ptexi=\i | |
89 \let\ptexindent=\indent | |
90 \let\ptexinsert=\insert | |
91 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ | |
92 \let\ptexless=< | |
93 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite | |
94 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | |
95 \let\ptexplus=+ | |
96 \let\ptexrbrace=\} | |
97 \let\ptexslash=\/ | |
98 \let\ptexstar=\* | |
99 \let\ptext=\t | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
100 \let\ptextop=\top |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
101 {\catcode`\'=\active |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
102 \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
103 \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright |
84318 | 104 |
105 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | |
106 % starts a new line in the output. | |
107 \newlinechar = `^^J | |
108 | |
109 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error | |
110 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | |
111 % | |
112 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | |
113 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | |
114 \else | |
115 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | |
116 \fi | |
117 | |
118 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. | |
119 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | |
120 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | |
121 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | |
122 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | |
123 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | |
124 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | |
125 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | |
126 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | |
127 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | |
128 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | |
129 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | |
130 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | |
131 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | |
132 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | |
133 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | |
134 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | |
135 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | |
136 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | |
137 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | |
138 % | |
139 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | |
140 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | |
141 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | |
142 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | |
143 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | |
144 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | |
145 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | |
146 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | |
147 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | |
148 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | |
149 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | |
150 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | |
151 % | |
152 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | |
153 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | |
154 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | |
155 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | |
156 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | |
157 | |
158 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. | |
159 \chardef\spacecat = 10 | |
160 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} | |
161 | |
162 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. | |
163 \chardef\colonChar = `\: | |
164 \chardef\commaChar = `\, | |
165 \chardef\dashChar = `\- | |
166 \chardef\dotChar = `\. | |
167 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | |
168 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` | |
169 \chardef\questChar = `\? | |
170 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' | |
171 \chardef\semiChar = `\; | |
172 \chardef\underChar = `\_ | |
173 | |
174 % Ignore a token. | |
175 % | |
176 \def\gobble#1{} | |
177 | |
178 % The following is used inside several \edef's. | |
179 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | |
180 | |
181 % Hyphenation fixes. | |
182 \hyphenation{ | |
183 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script | |
184 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | |
185 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script | |
186 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | |
187 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces | |
188 spell-ing spell-ings | |
189 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space | |
190 wide-spread wrap-around | |
191 } | |
192 | |
193 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | |
194 \newdimen\bindingoffset | |
195 \newdimen\normaloffset | |
196 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight | |
197 | |
198 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles | |
199 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | |
200 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | |
201 % | |
202 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | |
203 | |
204 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should | |
205 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the | |
206 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would | |
207 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | |
208 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | |
209 % | |
210 \def\|{% | |
211 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | |
212 \leavevmode | |
213 % | |
214 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | |
215 \vadjust{% | |
216 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | |
217 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | |
218 \vskip-\baselineskip | |
219 % | |
220 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So | |
221 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | |
222 \llap{% | |
223 % | |
224 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | |
225 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | |
226 % | |
227 % This is the space between the bar and the text. | |
228 \hskip 12pt | |
229 }% | |
230 }% | |
231 } | |
232 | |
233 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file | |
234 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, | |
235 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make | |
236 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | |
237 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | |
238 % | |
239 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | |
240 \def\loggingall{% | |
241 \tracingstats2 | |
242 \tracingpages1 | |
243 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex | |
244 \tracingparagraphs1 | |
245 \tracingoutput1 | |
246 \tracingmacros2 | |
247 \tracingrestores1 | |
248 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | |
249 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging | |
250 \tracingscantokens1 | |
251 \tracingifs1 | |
252 \tracinggroups1 | |
253 \tracingnesting2 | |
254 \tracingassigns1 | |
255 \fi | |
256 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex | |
257 \errorcontextlines16 | |
258 }% | |
259 | |
260 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing | |
261 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | |
262 % | |
263 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount | |
264 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | |
265 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | |
266 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | |
267 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | |
268 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | |
269 | |
270 % For @cropmarks command. | |
271 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | |
272 % | |
273 \newif\ifcropmarks | |
274 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | |
275 % | |
276 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | |
277 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | |
278 % | |
279 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | |
280 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc | |
281 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | |
282 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | |
283 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
284 % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
285 % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
286 % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
287 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
288 % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
289 % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
290 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
291 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
292 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
293 % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
294 % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
295 % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
296 % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
297 \def\domark{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
298 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
299 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
300 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
301 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
302 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
303 \mark{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
304 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
305 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
306 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
307 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
308 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
309 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
310 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
311 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
312 % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
313 % first @chapter. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
314 \def\gettopheadingmarks{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
315 \ifcase0\topmark\fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
316 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
317 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
318 \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
319 \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
320 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
321 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
322 \def\lastchapterdefs{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
323 \def\lastsectiondefs{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
324 \def\prevchapterdefs{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
325 \def\prevsectiondefs{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
326 \def\lastcolordefs{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
327 |
84318 | 328 % Main output routine. |
329 \chardef\PAGE = 255 | |
330 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | |
331 | |
332 \newbox\headlinebox | |
333 \newbox\footlinebox | |
334 | |
335 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents | |
336 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | |
337 \def\onepageout#1{% | |
338 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | |
339 % | |
340 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | |
341 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | |
342 % | |
343 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | |
344 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
345 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi |
84318 | 346 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
347 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi |
84318 | 348 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% |
349 % | |
350 {% | |
351 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | |
352 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | |
353 % before the \shipout runs. | |
354 % | |
355 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. | |
356 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | |
357 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. | |
358 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: | |
359 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} | |
360 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
361 % it needs to be |
84318 | 362 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} |
363 \shipout\vbox{% | |
364 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | |
365 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi | |
366 % | |
367 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | |
368 \hsize = \outerhsize | |
369 \vskip-\topandbottommargin | |
370 \vtop to0pt{% | |
371 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | |
372 \nointerlineskip | |
373 \line{% | |
374 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
375 \hfill | |
376 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
377 }% | |
378 \vss}% | |
379 \vskip\topandbottommargin | |
380 \line\bgroup | |
381 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | |
382 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | |
383 \vbox\bgroup | |
384 \fi | |
385 % | |
386 \unvbox\headlinebox | |
387 \pagebody{#1}% | |
388 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | |
389 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | |
390 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) | |
391 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | |
392 \vskip 24pt | |
393 \unvbox\footlinebox | |
394 \fi | |
395 % | |
396 \ifcropmarks | |
397 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | |
398 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | |
399 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | |
400 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | |
401 \vbox to0pt{\vss | |
402 \line{% | |
403 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
404 \hfill | |
405 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
406 }% | |
407 \nointerlineskip | |
408 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | |
409 }% | |
410 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | |
411 \fi | |
412 }% end of \shipout\vbox | |
413 }% end of group with \indexdummies | |
414 \advancepageno | |
415 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | |
416 } | |
417 | |
418 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | |
419 | |
420 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | |
421 {\catcode`\@ =11 | |
422 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | |
423 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | |
424 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | |
425 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
426 \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax |
84318 | 427 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi |
428 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | |
429 } | |
430 | |
431 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are | |
432 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | |
433 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | |
434 % | |
435 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | |
436 \def\nstop{\vbox | |
437 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | |
438 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | |
439 \def\nsbot{\vbox | |
440 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | |
441 | |
442 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of | |
443 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a | |
444 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | |
445 % | |
446 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} | |
447 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | |
448 \def\argtorun{#2}% | |
449 \begingroup | |
450 \obeylines | |
451 \spaceisspace | |
452 #1% | |
453 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | |
454 } | |
455 | |
456 {\obeylines % | |
457 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | |
458 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | |
459 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% | |
460 }% | |
461 } | |
462 | |
463 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. | |
464 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | |
465 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | |
466 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
467 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. |
84318 | 468 % |
469 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | |
470 % @end itemize @c foo | |
471 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed | |
472 % by \finishparsearg. | |
473 % | |
474 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | |
475 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | |
476 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | |
477 \def\temp{#3}% | |
478 \ifx\temp\empty | |
479 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: | |
480 \let\temp\finishparsearg | |
481 \else | |
482 \let\temp\argcheckspaces | |
483 \fi | |
484 % Put the space token in: | |
485 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | |
486 } | |
487 | |
488 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so | |
489 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | |
490 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | |
491 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
492 % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is |
84318 | 493 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger |
494 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | |
495 % | |
496 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. | |
497 % | |
498 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} | |
499 | |
500 % \parseargdef\foo{...} | |
501 % is roughly equivalent to | |
502 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | |
503 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | |
504 % | |
505 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | |
506 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 | |
507 | |
508 \def\parseargdef#1{% | |
509 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | |
510 } | |
511 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | |
512 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | |
513 \def#1##1% | |
514 } | |
515 | |
516 % Several utility definitions with active space: | |
517 { | |
518 \obeyspaces | |
519 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } | |
520 | |
521 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | |
522 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | |
523 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | |
524 % should produce a line of output anyway. | |
525 % | |
526 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | |
527 | |
528 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | |
529 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | |
530 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | |
531 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | |
532 } | |
533 | |
534 | |
535 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | |
536 | |
537 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: | |
538 % | |
539 % \envdef\foo{...} | |
540 % \def\Efoo{...} | |
541 % | |
542 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the | |
543 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also | |
544 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | |
545 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be | |
546 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | |
547 % | |
548 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
549 % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The |
84318 | 550 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this |
551 % special case.) | |
552 | |
553 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
554 % At run-time, environments start with this: |
84318 | 555 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} |
556 % initialize | |
557 \let\thisenv\empty | |
558 | |
559 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': | |
560 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
561 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
562 | |
563 % Check whether we're in the right environment: | |
564 \def\checkenv#1{% | |
565 \def\temp{#1}% | |
566 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
567 \else | |
568 \badenverr | |
569 \fi | |
570 } | |
571 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
572 % Environment mismatch, #1 expected: |
84318 | 573 \def\badenverr{% |
574 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
575 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, | |
576 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
577 } | |
578 \def\inenvironment#1{% | |
579 \ifx#1\empty | |
580 out of any environment% | |
581 \else | |
582 in environment \expandafter\string#1% | |
583 \fi | |
584 } | |
585 | |
586 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | |
587 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv | |
588 % | |
589 \parseargdef\end{% | |
590 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | |
591 \else | |
592 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 | |
593 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | |
594 \csname E#1\endcsname | |
595 \endgroup | |
596 \fi | |
597 } | |
598 | |
599 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} | |
600 | |
601 | |
602 %% Simple single-character @ commands | |
603 | |
604 % @@ prints an @ | |
605 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | |
606 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | |
607 | |
608 % This is turned off because it was never documented | |
609 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | |
610 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | |
611 %% but suppressing ligatures. | |
612 %\def\`{{`}} | |
613 %\def\'{{'}} | |
614 | |
615 % Used to generate quoted braces. | |
616 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | |
617 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | |
618 \let\{=\mylbrace | |
619 \let\}=\myrbrace | |
620 \begingroup | |
621 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, | |
622 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. | |
623 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | |
624 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 | |
625 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other | |
626 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | |
627 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | |
628 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | |
629 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | |
630 !endgroup | |
631 | |
632 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | |
633 \let\comma = , | |
634 | |
635 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | |
636 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. | |
637 \let\, = \c | |
638 \let\dotaccent = \. | |
639 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | |
640 \let\tieaccent = \t | |
641 \let\ubaraccent = \b | |
642 \let\udotaccent = \d | |
643 | |
644 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm | |
645 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | |
646 \def\questiondown{?`} | |
647 \def\exclamdown{!`} | |
648 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} | |
649 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | |
650 | |
651 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | |
652 \def\imacro{i} | |
653 \def\jmacro{j} | |
654 \def\dotless#1{% | |
655 \def\temp{#1}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
656 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
657 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi |
84318 | 658 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% |
659 \fi\fi | |
660 } | |
661 | |
662 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a | |
663 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) | |
664 % | |
665 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } | |
666 | |
667 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in | |
668 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | |
669 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | |
670 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | |
671 % \scriptscriptstyle). | |
672 % | |
673 \def\LaTeX{% | |
674 L\kern-.36em | |
675 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | |
676 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% | |
677 \kern-.15em | |
678 \TeX | |
679 } | |
680 | |
681 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space | |
682 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | |
683 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | |
684 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | |
685 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | |
686 {\catcode`@ = 11 | |
687 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | |
688 % if the definition is written into an index file. | |
689 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | |
690 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | |
691 } | |
692 | |
693 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | |
694 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | |
695 | |
696 % @* forces a line break. | |
697 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | |
698 | |
699 % @/ allows a line break. | |
700 \let\/=\allowbreak | |
701 | |
702 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. | |
703 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} | |
704 | |
705 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | |
706 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} | |
707 | |
708 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | |
709 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} | |
710 | |
711 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
712 % |
84318 | 713 \def\onword{on} |
714 \def\offword{off} | |
715 % | |
716 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% | |
717 \def\temp{#1}% | |
718 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing | |
719 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing | |
720 \else | |
721 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
722 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% | |
723 \fi\fi | |
724 } | |
725 | |
726 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | |
727 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | |
728 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | |
729 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | |
730 | |
731 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | |
732 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | |
733 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for | |
734 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | |
735 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, | |
736 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | |
737 % the text is small, which looks bad. | |
738 % | |
739 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can | |
740 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | |
741 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an | |
742 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The | |
743 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | |
744 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | |
745 % | |
746 \newbox\groupbox | |
747 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | |
748 % | |
749 \envdef\group{% | |
750 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | |
751 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp | |
752 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | |
753 \fi | |
754 \startsavinginserts | |
755 % | |
756 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup | |
757 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as | |
758 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | |
759 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after | |
760 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group | |
761 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | |
762 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | |
763 \comment | |
764 } | |
765 % | |
766 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts | |
767 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | |
768 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | |
769 % above. But it's pretty close. | |
770 \def\Egroup{% | |
771 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | |
772 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | |
773 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | |
774 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | |
775 \egroup % End the \vtop. | |
776 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | |
777 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | |
778 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | |
779 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | |
780 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | |
781 % group, force a page break. | |
782 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
783 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | |
784 \page | |
785 \fi | |
786 \fi | |
787 \box\groupbox | |
788 \prevdepth = \dimen1 | |
789 \checkinserts | |
790 } | |
791 % | |
792 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help | |
793 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | |
794 % | |
795 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | |
796 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | |
797 where each line of input produces a line of output.} | |
798 | |
799 % @need space-in-mils | |
800 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | |
801 | |
802 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in | |
803 | |
804 % Old definition--didn't work. | |
805 %\parseargdef\need{\par % | |
806 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally | |
807 %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | |
808 %{\baselineskip=0pt% | |
809 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | |
810 %\prevdepth=-1000pt | |
811 %}} | |
812 | |
813 \parseargdef\need{% | |
814 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a | |
815 % paragraph. | |
816 \par | |
817 % | |
818 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | |
819 \dimen0 = #1\mil | |
820 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | |
821 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | |
822 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
823 % | |
824 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | |
825 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | |
826 % And a page break here is fine. | |
827 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | |
828 % | |
829 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | |
830 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the | |
831 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | |
832 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | |
833 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. | |
834 % | |
835 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | |
836 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | |
837 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | |
838 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | |
839 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an | |
840 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | |
841 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | |
842 \penalty9999 | |
843 % | |
844 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | |
845 \kern -#1\mil | |
846 % | |
847 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | |
848 \nobreak | |
849 \fi | |
850 } | |
851 | |
852 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). | |
853 | |
854 \let\br = \par | |
855 | |
856 % @page forces the start of a new page. | |
857 % | |
858 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
859 | |
860 % @exdent text.... | |
861 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | |
862 | |
863 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | |
864 % That's how much \exdent should take out. | |
865 \newskip\exdentamount | |
866 | |
867 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | |
868 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} | |
869 | |
870 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | |
871 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount | |
872 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | |
873 | |
874 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | |
875 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | |
876 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. | |
877 % | |
878 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | |
879 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | |
880 % | |
881 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | |
882 \nobreak | |
883 \kern-\strutdepth | |
884 \vtop to \strutdepth{% | |
885 \baselineskip=\strutdepth | |
886 \vss | |
887 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | |
888 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | |
889 \ifx#1l% | |
890 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | |
891 \else | |
892 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | |
893 \fi | |
894 \null | |
895 }% | |
896 }} | |
897 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | |
898 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | |
899 % | |
900 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | |
901 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | |
902 % else use TEXT for both). | |
903 % | |
904 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} | |
905 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | |
906 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
907 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
908 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts | |
909 \def\righttext{#2}% | |
910 \else | |
911 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text | |
912 \def\righttext{#1}% | |
913 \fi | |
914 % | |
915 \ifodd\pageno | |
916 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | |
917 \else | |
918 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | |
919 \fi | |
920 \temp | |
921 } | |
922 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
923 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. |
84318 | 924 % |
925 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | |
926 \def\includezzz#1{% | |
927 \pushthisfilestack | |
928 \def\thisfile{#1}% | |
929 {% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
930 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
931 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
932 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
933 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
934 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
935 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
936 % definitions, etc. |
84318 | 937 \expandafter |
938 }\temp | |
939 \popthisfilestack | |
940 } | |
941 \def\filenamecatcodes{% | |
942 \catcode`\\=\other | |
943 \catcode`~=\other | |
944 \catcode`^=\other | |
945 \catcode`_=\other | |
946 \catcode`|=\other | |
947 \catcode`<=\other | |
948 \catcode`>=\other | |
949 \catcode`+=\other | |
950 \catcode`-=\other | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
951 \catcode`\`=\other |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
952 \catcode`\'=\other |
84318 | 953 } |
954 | |
955 \def\pushthisfilestack{% | |
956 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | |
957 } | |
958 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | |
959 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | |
960 } | |
961 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | |
962 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | |
963 } | |
964 | |
965 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} | |
966 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | |
967 the stack of filenames is empty.}} | |
968 | |
969 \def\thisfile{} | |
970 | |
971 % @center line | |
972 % outputs that line, centered. | |
973 % | |
974 \parseargdef\center{% | |
975 \ifhmode | |
976 \let\next\centerH | |
977 \else | |
978 \let\next\centerV | |
979 \fi | |
980 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | |
981 } | |
982 \def\centerH#1{% | |
983 {% | |
984 \hfil\break | |
985 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | |
986 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
987 \line{#1}% | |
988 \break | |
989 }% | |
990 } | |
991 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | |
992 | |
993 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space | |
994 | |
995 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} | |
996 | |
997 % @comment ...line which is ignored... | |
998 % @c is the same as @comment | |
999 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment | |
1000 | |
1001 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | |
1002 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | |
1003 \commentxxx} | |
1004 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | |
1005 | |
1006 \let\c=\comment | |
1007 | |
1008 % @paragraphindent NCHARS | |
1009 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | |
1010 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. | |
1011 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | |
1012 % | |
1013 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords | |
1014 \def\noneword{none} | |
1015 % | |
1016 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% | |
1017 \def\temp{#1}% | |
1018 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
1019 \else | |
1020 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
1021 \defaultparindent = 0pt | |
1022 \else | |
1023 \defaultparindent = #1em | |
1024 \fi | |
1025 \fi | |
1026 \parindent = \defaultparindent | |
1027 } | |
1028 | |
1029 % @exampleindent NCHARS | |
1030 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | |
1031 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | |
1032 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | |
1033 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% | |
1034 \def\temp{#1}% | |
1035 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
1036 \else | |
1037 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
1038 \lispnarrowing = 0pt | |
1039 \else | |
1040 \lispnarrowing = #1em | |
1041 \fi | |
1042 \fi | |
1043 } | |
1044 | |
1045 % @firstparagraphindent WORD | |
1046 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | |
1047 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | |
1048 % paragraphs. | |
1049 % | |
1050 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling | |
1051 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | |
1052 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | |
1053 % By default, we suppress indentation. | |
1054 % | |
1055 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
1056 \def\insertword{insert} | |
1057 % | |
1058 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | |
1059 \def\temp{#1}% | |
1060 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
1061 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | |
1062 \else\ifx\temp\insertword | |
1063 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | |
1064 \else | |
1065 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
1066 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | |
1067 \fi\fi | |
1068 } | |
1069 | |
1070 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to | |
1071 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | |
1072 % | |
1073 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next | |
1074 % paragraph. | |
1075 % | |
1076 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | |
1077 \gdef\indent{% | |
1078 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1079 \indent | |
1080 }% | |
1081 \gdef\noindent{% | |
1082 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1083 \noindent | |
1084 }% | |
1085 \global\everypar = {% | |
1086 \kern -\parindent | |
1087 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1088 }% | |
1089 } | |
1090 | |
1091 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% | |
1092 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | |
1093 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | |
1094 \global \everypar = {}% | |
1095 } | |
1096 | |
1097 | |
1098 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. | |
1099 % | |
1100 \def\asis#1{#1} | |
1101 | |
1102 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. | |
1103 % | |
1104 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | |
1105 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make | |
1106 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, | |
1107 % which is what @var uses. | |
1108 { | |
1109 \catcode`\_ = \active | |
1110 \gdef\mathunderscore{% | |
1111 \catcode`\_=\active | |
1112 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | |
1113 } | |
1114 } | |
1115 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. | |
1116 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but | |
1117 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not | |
1118 % otherwise define @\. | |
1119 % | |
1120 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. | |
1121 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | |
1122 % | |
1123 \def\math{% | |
1124 \tex | |
1125 \mathunderscore | |
1126 \let\\ = \mathbackslash | |
1127 \mathactive | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1128 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1129 \let\"=\ddot |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1130 \let\'=\acute |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1131 \let\==\bar |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1132 \let\^=\hat |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1133 \let\`=\grave |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1134 \let\u=\breve |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1135 \let\v=\check |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1136 \let\~=\tilde |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1137 \let\dotaccent=\dot |
84318 | 1138 $\finishmath |
1139 } | |
1140 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. | |
1141 | |
1142 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | |
1143 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | |
1144 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | |
1145 % | |
1146 { | |
1147 \catcode`^ = \active | |
1148 \catcode`< = \active | |
1149 \catcode`> = \active | |
1150 \catcode`+ = \active | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1151 \catcode`' = \active |
84318 | 1152 \gdef\mathactive{% |
1153 \let^ = \ptexhat | |
1154 \let< = \ptexless | |
1155 \let> = \ptexgtr | |
1156 \let+ = \ptexplus | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1157 \let' = \ptexquoteright |
84318 | 1158 } |
1159 } | |
1160 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1161 % Some math mode symbols. |
84318 | 1162 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1163 \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1164 \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1165 \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} |
84318 | 1166 |
1167 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | |
1168 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm | |
1169 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, | |
1170 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do | |
1171 % whichever is larger. | |
1172 % | |
1173 \def\dots{% | |
1174 \leavevmode | |
1175 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods | |
1176 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em | |
1177 \dimen0 = \wd0 | |
1178 \else | |
1179 \dimen0 = 1.5em | |
1180 \fi | |
1181 \hbox to \dimen0{% | |
1182 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil | |
1183 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | |
1184 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | |
1185 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil | |
1186 }% | |
1187 } | |
1188 | |
1189 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | |
1190 % | |
1191 \def\enddots{% | |
1192 \dots | |
1193 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor | |
1194 } | |
1195 | |
1196 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up | |
1197 % Texinfo's parsing. | |
1198 % | |
1199 \let\comma = , | |
1200 | |
1201 % @refill is a no-op. | |
1202 \let\refill=\relax | |
1203 | |
1204 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | |
1205 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | |
1206 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | |
1207 % | |
1208 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | |
1209 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | |
1210 | |
1211 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | |
1212 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | |
1213 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | |
1214 \def\setfilename{% | |
1215 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. | |
1216 \iflinks | |
1217 \tryauxfile | |
1218 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. | |
1219 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | |
1220 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. | |
1221 \openindices | |
1222 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. | |
1223 % | |
1224 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | |
1225 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | |
1226 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | |
1227 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi | |
1228 \closein 1 | |
1229 % | |
1230 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | |
1231 } | |
1232 | |
1233 % Called from \setfilename. | |
1234 % | |
1235 \def\openindices{% | |
1236 \newindex{cp}% | |
1237 \newcodeindex{fn}% | |
1238 \newcodeindex{vr}% | |
1239 \newcodeindex{tp}% | |
1240 \newcodeindex{ky}% | |
1241 \newcodeindex{pg}% | |
1242 } | |
1243 | |
1244 % @bye. | |
1245 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | |
1246 | |
1247 | |
1248 \message{pdf,} | |
1249 % adobe `portable' document format | |
1250 \newcount\tempnum | |
1251 \newcount\lnkcount | |
1252 \newtoks\filename | |
1253 \newcount\filenamelength | |
1254 \newcount\pgn | |
1255 \newtoks\toksA | |
1256 \newtoks\toksB | |
1257 \newtoks\toksC | |
1258 \newtoks\toksD | |
1259 \newbox\boxA | |
1260 \newcount\countA | |
1261 \newif\ifpdf | |
1262 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | |
1263 | |
1264 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 | |
1265 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, | |
1266 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. | |
1267 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined | |
1268 \else | |
1269 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax | |
1270 \else | |
1271 \ifcase\pdfoutput | |
1272 \else | |
1273 \pdftrue | |
1274 \fi | |
1275 \fi | |
1276 \fi | |
1277 | |
1278 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, | |
1279 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to | |
1280 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be | |
1281 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. | |
1282 % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html | |
1283 % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX | |
1284 % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so | |
1285 % that's what we do). | |
1286 | |
1287 % double active backslashes. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1288 % |
84318 | 1289 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active |
1290 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% | |
1291 @catcode`@\=@active | |
1292 @let\=@doublebackslash} | |
1293 } | |
1294 | |
1295 % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are | |
1296 % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as | |
1297 % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor | |
1298 % changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission | |
1299 % from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1300 % |
84318 | 1301 % #1 is the tokens to replace. |
1302 % #2 is the replacement. | |
1303 % #3 is the control sequence with the string. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1304 % |
84318 | 1305 \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% |
1306 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% | |
1307 ##1% | |
1308 \ifx\\##2\\% | |
1309 \else | |
1310 #2% | |
1311 \HyReturnAfterFi{% | |
1312 \HyPsdReplace##2\END | |
1313 }% | |
1314 \fi | |
1315 }% | |
1316 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% | |
1317 } | |
1318 \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} | |
1319 | |
1320 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. | |
1321 \def\backslashparens#1{% | |
1322 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply | |
1323 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. | |
1324 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% | |
1325 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% | |
1326 } | |
1327 | |
1328 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images | |
1329 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot | |
1330 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI | |
1331 output) for that.)} | |
1332 | |
1333 \ifpdf | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1334 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1335 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex, |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1336 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1337 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1338 % of actual black. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1339 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1340 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1341 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1342 % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1343 % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1344 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1345 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1346 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1347 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1348 \def\setcolor#1{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1349 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1350 \domark |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1351 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1352 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1353 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1354 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1355 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1356 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1357 \def\lastcolordefs{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1358 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1359 \def\makefootline{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1360 \baselineskip24pt |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1361 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1362 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1363 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1364 \def\makeheadline{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1365 \vbox to 0pt{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1366 \vskip-22.5pt |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1367 \line{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1368 \vbox to8.5pt{}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1369 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1370 \getcolormarks |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1371 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1372 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1373 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1374 \vss |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1375 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1376 \nointerlineskip |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1377 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1378 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1379 % |
84318 | 1380 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} |
1381 % | |
1382 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). | |
1383 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% | |
1384 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
1385 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
1386 % | |
1387 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among | |
1388 % others). Let's try in that order. | |
1389 \let\pdfimgext=\empty | |
1390 \begingroup | |
1391 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 | |
1392 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 | |
1393 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 | |
1394 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 | |
1395 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1396 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1397 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1398 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1399 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1400 \fi |
84318 | 1401 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% |
1402 \fi | |
1403 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% | |
1404 \fi | |
1405 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% | |
1406 \fi | |
1407 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% | |
1408 \fi | |
1409 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% | |
1410 \fi | |
1411 \closein 1 | |
1412 \endgroup | |
1413 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1414 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is |
84318 | 1415 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) |
1416 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1417 \immediate\pdfimage | |
1418 \else | |
1419 \immediate\pdfximage | |
1420 \fi | |
1421 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi | |
1422 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi | |
1423 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 | |
1424 #1.\pdfimgext | |
1425 \else | |
1426 {#1.\pdfimgext}% | |
1427 \fi | |
1428 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | |
1429 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | |
1430 \fi} | |
1431 % | |
1432 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% | |
1433 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters | |
1434 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. | |
1435 \indexnofonts | |
1436 \turnoffactive | |
1437 \activebackslashdouble | |
1438 \makevalueexpandable | |
1439 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% | |
1440 \backslashparens\pdfdestname | |
1441 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% | |
1442 }} | |
1443 % | |
1444 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. | |
1445 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} | |
1446 % | |
1447 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as | |
1448 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1449 \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1450 \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1451 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} |
84318 | 1452 % |
1453 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | |
1454 % come from Petr Olsak | |
1455 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | |
1456 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | |
1457 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | |
1458 \advance\tempnum by 1 | |
1459 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} | |
1460 % | |
1461 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the | |
1462 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number | |
1463 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, | |
1464 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. | |
1465 % #4 is the page number | |
1466 % | |
1467 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% | |
1468 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | |
1469 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section | |
1470 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | |
1471 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. | |
1472 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1473 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty | |
1474 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% | |
1475 \else | |
1476 % Doubled backslashes in the name. | |
1477 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1478 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% | |
1479 \fi | |
1480 % | |
1481 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. | |
1482 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% | |
1483 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1484 % | |
1485 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1486 } | |
1487 % | |
1488 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | |
1489 \begingroup | |
1490 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks | |
1491 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace | |
1492 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | |
1493 % | |
1494 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. | |
1495 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1496 \def\thischapnum{##2}% | |
1497 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1498 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1499 }% | |
1500 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1501 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | |
1502 \def\thissecnum{##2}% | |
1503 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1504 }% | |
1505 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1506 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | |
1507 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | |
1508 }% | |
1509 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1510 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | |
1511 }% | |
1512 \def\thischapnum{0}% | |
1513 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1514 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1515 % | |
1516 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | |
1517 % al. a second time, below. | |
1518 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1519 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1520 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1521 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1522 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1523 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1524 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1525 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1526 \readdatafile{toc}% | |
1527 % | |
1528 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | |
1529 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | |
1530 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | |
1531 % | |
1532 % We use the node names as the destinations. | |
1533 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1534 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1535 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1536 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1537 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1538 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1539 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | |
1540 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1541 % | |
1542 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | |
1543 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, | |
1544 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from | |
1545 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from | |
1546 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | |
1547 % | |
1548 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to | |
1549 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right | |
1550 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. | |
1551 \indexnofonts | |
1552 \setupdatafile | |
1553 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash | |
1554 \input \tocreadfilename | |
1555 \endgroup | |
1556 } | |
1557 % | |
1558 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% | |
1559 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | |
1560 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | |
1561 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | |
1562 \advance\filenamelength by 1 | |
1563 \fi | |
1564 \fi | |
1565 \nextsp} | |
1566 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | |
1567 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1568 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | |
1569 \else | |
1570 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | |
1571 \fi | |
1572 % make a live url in pdf output. | |
1573 \def\pdfurl#1{% | |
1574 \begingroup | |
1575 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not | |
1576 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context | |
1577 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one | |
1578 % people have actually reported a problem with. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1579 % |
84318 | 1580 \normalturnoffactive |
1581 \def\@{@}% | |
1582 \let\/=\empty | |
1583 \makevalueexpandable | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1584 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1585 % special-casing \var here? |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1586 \def\var##1{##1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1587 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1588 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% |
84318 | 1589 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
1590 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | |
1591 \endgroup} | |
1592 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | |
1593 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | |
1594 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | |
1595 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | |
1596 \def\maketoks{% | |
1597 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax | |
1598 \ifx\first0\adn0 | |
1599 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | |
1600 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | |
1601 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 | |
1602 \else | |
1603 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | |
1604 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | |
1605 \let\next=\maketoks | |
1606 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | |
1607 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | |
1608 \fi | |
1609 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
1610 \next} | |
1611 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | |
1612 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | |
1613 \def\pdflink#1{% | |
1614 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1615 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} |
84318 | 1616 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} |
1617 \else | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1618 % non-pdf mode |
84318 | 1619 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble |
1620 \let\pdfurl = \gobble | |
1621 \let\endlink = \relax | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1622 \let\setcolor = \gobble |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1623 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble |
84318 | 1624 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax |
1625 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | |
1626 | |
1627 | |
1628 \message{fonts,} | |
1629 | |
1630 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | |
1631 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | |
1632 % italics, not bold italics. | |
1633 % | |
1634 \def\setfontstyle#1{% | |
1635 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | |
1636 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font | |
1637 } | |
1638 | |
1639 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | |
1640 % | |
1641 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} | |
1642 | |
1643 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | |
1644 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | |
1645 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | |
1646 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} | |
1647 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} | |
1648 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1649 % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1650 % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1651 \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1652 |
84318 | 1653 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
1654 % So we set up a \sf. | |
1655 \newfam\sffam | |
1656 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} | |
1657 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. | |
1658 | |
1659 % We don't need math for this font style. | |
1660 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | |
1661 | |
1662 | |
1663 % Default leading. | |
1664 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt | |
1665 | |
1666 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | |
1667 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | |
1668 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | |
1669 % | |
1670 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | |
1671 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | |
1672 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | |
1673 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1674 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1675 \def\baselinefactor{1} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1676 % |
84318 | 1677 \def\setleading#1{% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1678 \dimen0 = #1\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1679 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 |
84318 | 1680 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip |
1681 \normalbaselines | |
1682 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | |
1683 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | |
1684 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | |
1685 }% | |
1686 } | |
1687 | |
1688 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. | |
1689 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1690 % do nothing with this by default. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1691 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1692 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1693 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1694 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1695 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1696 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1697 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1698 \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else |
84318 | 1699 \begingroup |
1700 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | |
1701 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | |
1702 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1703 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1704 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) | |
1705 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) | |
1706 %%Version: 1.000 | |
1707 %%EndComments | |
1708 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | |
1709 12 dict begin | |
1710 begincmap | |
1711 /CIDSystemInfo | |
1712 << /Registry (TeX) | |
1713 /Ordering (OT1) | |
1714 /Supplement 0 | |
1715 >> def | |
1716 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def | |
1717 /CMapType 2 def | |
1718 1 begincodespacerange | |
1719 <00> <7F> | |
1720 endcodespacerange | |
1721 8 beginbfrange | |
1722 <00> <01> <0393> | |
1723 <09> <0A> <03A8> | |
1724 <23> <26> <0023> | |
1725 <28> <3B> <0028> | |
1726 <3F> <5B> <003F> | |
1727 <5D> <5E> <005D> | |
1728 <61> <7A> <0061> | |
1729 <7B> <7C> <2013> | |
1730 endbfrange | |
1731 40 beginbfchar | |
1732 <02> <0398> | |
1733 <03> <039B> | |
1734 <04> <039E> | |
1735 <05> <03A0> | |
1736 <06> <03A3> | |
1737 <07> <03D2> | |
1738 <08> <03A6> | |
1739 <0B> <00660066> | |
1740 <0C> <00660069> | |
1741 <0D> <0066006C> | |
1742 <0E> <006600660069> | |
1743 <0F> <00660066006C> | |
1744 <10> <0131> | |
1745 <11> <0237> | |
1746 <12> <0060> | |
1747 <13> <00B4> | |
1748 <14> <02C7> | |
1749 <15> <02D8> | |
1750 <16> <00AF> | |
1751 <17> <02DA> | |
1752 <18> <00B8> | |
1753 <19> <00DF> | |
1754 <1A> <00E6> | |
1755 <1B> <0153> | |
1756 <1C> <00F8> | |
1757 <1D> <00C6> | |
1758 <1E> <0152> | |
1759 <1F> <00D8> | |
1760 <21> <0021> | |
1761 <22> <201D> | |
1762 <27> <2019> | |
1763 <3C> <00A1> | |
1764 <3D> <003D> | |
1765 <3E> <00BF> | |
1766 <5C> <201C> | |
1767 <5F> <02D9> | |
1768 <60> <2018> | |
1769 <7D> <02DD> | |
1770 <7E> <007E> | |
1771 <7F> <00A8> | |
1772 endbfchar | |
1773 endcmap | |
1774 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | |
1775 end | |
1776 end | |
1777 %%EndResource | |
1778 %%EOF | |
1779 }\endgroup | |
1780 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% | |
1781 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | |
1782 }% | |
1783 % | |
1784 % \cmapOT1IT | |
1785 \begingroup | |
1786 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | |
1787 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | |
1788 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1789 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1790 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) | |
1791 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) | |
1792 %%Version: 1.000 | |
1793 %%EndComments | |
1794 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | |
1795 12 dict begin | |
1796 begincmap | |
1797 /CIDSystemInfo | |
1798 << /Registry (TeX) | |
1799 /Ordering (OT1IT) | |
1800 /Supplement 0 | |
1801 >> def | |
1802 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def | |
1803 /CMapType 2 def | |
1804 1 begincodespacerange | |
1805 <00> <7F> | |
1806 endcodespacerange | |
1807 8 beginbfrange | |
1808 <00> <01> <0393> | |
1809 <09> <0A> <03A8> | |
1810 <25> <26> <0025> | |
1811 <28> <3B> <0028> | |
1812 <3F> <5B> <003F> | |
1813 <5D> <5E> <005D> | |
1814 <61> <7A> <0061> | |
1815 <7B> <7C> <2013> | |
1816 endbfrange | |
1817 42 beginbfchar | |
1818 <02> <0398> | |
1819 <03> <039B> | |
1820 <04> <039E> | |
1821 <05> <03A0> | |
1822 <06> <03A3> | |
1823 <07> <03D2> | |
1824 <08> <03A6> | |
1825 <0B> <00660066> | |
1826 <0C> <00660069> | |
1827 <0D> <0066006C> | |
1828 <0E> <006600660069> | |
1829 <0F> <00660066006C> | |
1830 <10> <0131> | |
1831 <11> <0237> | |
1832 <12> <0060> | |
1833 <13> <00B4> | |
1834 <14> <02C7> | |
1835 <15> <02D8> | |
1836 <16> <00AF> | |
1837 <17> <02DA> | |
1838 <18> <00B8> | |
1839 <19> <00DF> | |
1840 <1A> <00E6> | |
1841 <1B> <0153> | |
1842 <1C> <00F8> | |
1843 <1D> <00C6> | |
1844 <1E> <0152> | |
1845 <1F> <00D8> | |
1846 <21> <0021> | |
1847 <22> <201D> | |
1848 <23> <0023> | |
1849 <24> <00A3> | |
1850 <27> <2019> | |
1851 <3C> <00A1> | |
1852 <3D> <003D> | |
1853 <3E> <00BF> | |
1854 <5C> <201C> | |
1855 <5F> <02D9> | |
1856 <60> <2018> | |
1857 <7D> <02DD> | |
1858 <7E> <007E> | |
1859 <7F> <00A8> | |
1860 endbfchar | |
1861 endcmap | |
1862 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | |
1863 end | |
1864 end | |
1865 %%EndResource | |
1866 %%EOF | |
1867 }\endgroup | |
1868 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% | |
1869 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | |
1870 }% | |
1871 % | |
1872 % \cmapOT1TT | |
1873 \begingroup | |
1874 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | |
1875 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | |
1876 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1877 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1878 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) | |
1879 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) | |
1880 %%Version: 1.000 | |
1881 %%EndComments | |
1882 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | |
1883 12 dict begin | |
1884 begincmap | |
1885 /CIDSystemInfo | |
1886 << /Registry (TeX) | |
1887 /Ordering (OT1TT) | |
1888 /Supplement 0 | |
1889 >> def | |
1890 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def | |
1891 /CMapType 2 def | |
1892 1 begincodespacerange | |
1893 <00> <7F> | |
1894 endcodespacerange | |
1895 5 beginbfrange | |
1896 <00> <01> <0393> | |
1897 <09> <0A> <03A8> | |
1898 <21> <26> <0021> | |
1899 <28> <5F> <0028> | |
1900 <61> <7E> <0061> | |
1901 endbfrange | |
1902 32 beginbfchar | |
1903 <02> <0398> | |
1904 <03> <039B> | |
1905 <04> <039E> | |
1906 <05> <03A0> | |
1907 <06> <03A3> | |
1908 <07> <03D2> | |
1909 <08> <03A6> | |
1910 <0B> <2191> | |
1911 <0C> <2193> | |
1912 <0D> <0027> | |
1913 <0E> <00A1> | |
1914 <0F> <00BF> | |
1915 <10> <0131> | |
1916 <11> <0237> | |
1917 <12> <0060> | |
1918 <13> <00B4> | |
1919 <14> <02C7> | |
1920 <15> <02D8> | |
1921 <16> <00AF> | |
1922 <17> <02DA> | |
1923 <18> <00B8> | |
1924 <19> <00DF> | |
1925 <1A> <00E6> | |
1926 <1B> <0153> | |
1927 <1C> <00F8> | |
1928 <1D> <00C6> | |
1929 <1E> <0152> | |
1930 <1F> <00D8> | |
1931 <20> <2423> | |
1932 <27> <2019> | |
1933 <60> <2018> | |
1934 <7F> <00A8> | |
1935 endbfchar | |
1936 endcmap | |
1937 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | |
1938 end | |
1939 end | |
1940 %%EndResource | |
1941 %%EOF | |
1942 }\endgroup | |
1943 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% | |
1944 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | |
1945 }% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1946 \fi\fi |
84318 | 1947 |
1948 | |
1949 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the | |
1950 % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | |
1951 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap | |
1952 % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass | |
1953 % empty to omit). | |
1954 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% | |
1955 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 | |
1956 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% | |
1957 } | |
1958 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. | |
1959 \let\cmap\gobble | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1960 % emacs-page end of cmaps |
84318 | 1961 |
1962 % Use cm as the default font prefix. | |
1963 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | |
1964 % before you read in texinfo.tex. | |
1965 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | |
1966 \def\fontprefix{cm} | |
1967 \fi | |
1968 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | |
1969 \def\rmshape{r} | |
1970 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold | |
1971 \def\bfshape{b} | |
1972 \def\bxshape{bx} | |
1973 \def\ttshape{tt} | |
1974 \def\ttbshape{tt} | |
1975 \def\ttslshape{sltt} | |
1976 \def\itshape{ti} | |
1977 \def\itbshape{bxti} | |
1978 \def\slshape{sl} | |
1979 \def\slbshape{bxsl} | |
1980 \def\sfshape{ss} | |
1981 \def\sfbshape{ss} | |
1982 \def\scshape{csc} | |
1983 \def\scbshape{csc} | |
1984 | |
1985 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in | |
1986 % Texinfo. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
1987 % |
84318 | 1988 \def\definetextfontsizexi{% |
1989 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). | |
1990 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} | |
1991 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} | |
1992 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1993 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
1994 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1995 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} | |
1996 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1997 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1998 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1999 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
2000 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
2001 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2002 \def\textecsize{1095} |
84318 | 2003 |
2004 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. | |
2005 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2006 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2007 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2008 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | |
2009 | |
2010 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | |
2011 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} | |
2012 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2013 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2014 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2015 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2016 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2017 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2018 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2019 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | |
2020 \font\smalli=cmmi9 | |
2021 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2022 \def\smallecsize{0900} |
84318 | 2023 |
2024 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). | |
2025 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} | |
2026 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2027 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2028 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
2029 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2030 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2031 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2032 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
2033 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} | |
2034 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | |
2035 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2036 \def\smallerecsize{0800} |
84318 | 2037 |
2038 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): | |
2039 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | |
2040 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} | |
2041 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} | |
2042 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | |
2043 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | |
2044 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} | |
2045 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2046 \let\titlebf=\titlerm | |
2047 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | |
2048 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | |
2049 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2050 \def\titleecsize{2074} |
84318 | 2051 |
2052 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | |
2053 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} | |
2054 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
2055 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} | |
2056 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} | |
2057 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | |
2058 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | |
2059 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} | |
2060 \let\chapbf=\chaprm | |
2061 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} | |
2062 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | |
2063 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2064 \def\chapecsize{1728} |
84318 | 2065 |
2066 % Section fonts (14.4pt). | |
2067 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} | |
2068 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2069 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} | |
2070 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
2071 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2072 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | |
2073 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2074 \let\secbf\secrm | |
2075 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
2076 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | |
2077 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2078 \def\sececsize{1440} |
84318 | 2079 |
2080 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | |
2081 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} | |
2082 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | |
2083 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} | |
2084 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} | |
2085 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | |
2086 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} | |
2087 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | |
2088 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | |
2089 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} | |
2090 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf | |
2091 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2092 \def\ssececsize{1200} |
84318 | 2093 |
2094 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | |
2095 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} | |
2096 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2097 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2098 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2099 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2100 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2101 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2102 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2103 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2104 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 | |
2105 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2106 \def\reducedecsize{1000} |
84318 | 2107 |
2108 % reset the current fonts | |
2109 \textfonts | |
2110 \rm | |
2111 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions | |
2112 | |
2113 | |
2114 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with | |
2115 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU | |
2116 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the | |
2117 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2118 % |
84318 | 2119 \def\definetextfontsizex{% |
2120 % Text fonts (10pt). | |
2121 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} | |
2122 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} | |
2123 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
2124 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
2125 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
2126 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} | |
2127 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
2128 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
2129 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
2130 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
2131 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
2132 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2133 \def\textecsize{1000} |
84318 | 2134 |
2135 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. | |
2136 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | |
2137 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | |
2138 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | |
2139 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | |
2140 | |
2141 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | |
2142 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} | |
2143 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2144 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2145 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2146 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2147 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2148 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2149 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2150 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | |
2151 \font\smalli=cmmi9 | |
2152 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2153 \def\smallecsize{0900} |
84318 | 2154 |
2155 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). | |
2156 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} | |
2157 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2158 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2159 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
2160 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2161 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2162 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2163 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
2164 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} | |
2165 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | |
2166 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2167 \def\smallerecsize{0800} |
84318 | 2168 |
2169 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): | |
2170 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | |
2171 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} | |
2172 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} | |
2173 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | |
2174 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | |
2175 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} | |
2176 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2177 \let\titlebf=\titlerm | |
2178 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | |
2179 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | |
2180 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2181 \def\titleecsize{2074} |
84318 | 2182 |
2183 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). | |
2184 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} | |
2185 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2186 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} | |
2187 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
2188 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2189 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | |
2190 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2191 \let\chapbf\chaprm | |
2192 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
2193 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | |
2194 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2195 \def\chapecsize{1440} |
84318 | 2196 |
2197 % Section fonts (12pt). | |
2198 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} | |
2199 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | |
2200 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} | |
2201 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2202 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2203 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2204 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | |
2205 \let\secbf\secrm | |
2206 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2207 \font\seci=cmmi12 |
84318 | 2208 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2209 \def\sececsize{1200} |
84318 | 2210 |
2211 % Subsection fonts (10pt). | |
2212 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} | |
2213 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2214 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2215 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2216 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2217 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2218 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2219 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | |
2220 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2221 \font\sseci=cmmi10 | |
2222 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2223 \def\ssececsize{1000} |
84318 | 2224 |
2225 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). | |
2226 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} | |
2227 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2228 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2229 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2230 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2231 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2232 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2233 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2234 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | |
2235 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 | |
2236 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2237 \def\reducedecsize{0900} |
84318 | 2238 |
2239 % reduce space between paragraphs | |
2240 \divide\parskip by 2 | |
2241 | |
2242 % reset the current fonts | |
2243 \textfonts | |
2244 \rm | |
2245 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions | |
2246 | |
2247 | |
2248 % We provide the user-level command | |
2249 % @fonttextsize 10 | |
2250 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2251 % |
84318 | 2252 \def\xword{10} |
2253 \def\xiword{11} | |
2254 % | |
2255 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% | |
2256 \def\textsizearg{#1}% | |
2257 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% | |
2258 % | |
2259 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since | |
2260 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2261 % |
84318 | 2262 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 |
2263 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex | |
2264 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi | |
2265 \else | |
2266 \errhelp=\EMsimple | |
2267 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} | |
2268 \fi\fi | |
2269 \endgroup | |
2270 } | |
2271 | |
2272 | |
2273 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, | |
2274 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since | |
2275 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except | |
2276 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | |
2277 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | |
2278 % | |
2279 \def\resetmathfonts{% | |
2280 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy | |
2281 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | |
2282 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | |
2283 } | |
2284 | |
2285 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | |
2286 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the | |
2287 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | |
2288 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | |
2289 % | |
2290 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) | |
2291 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in | |
2292 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | |
2293 % | |
2294 % This all needs generalizing, badly. | |
2295 % | |
2296 \def\textfonts{% | |
2297 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | |
2298 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | |
2299 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy | |
2300 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | |
2301 \def\curfontsize{text}% | |
2302 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
2303 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} | |
2304 \def\titlefonts{% | |
2305 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | |
2306 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | |
2307 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | |
2308 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | |
2309 \def\curfontsize{title}% | |
2310 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% | |
2311 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2312 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} |
84318 | 2313 \def\chapfonts{% |
2314 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | |
2315 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | |
2316 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy | |
2317 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | |
2318 \def\curfontsize{chap}% | |
2319 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% | |
2320 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} | |
2321 \def\secfonts{% | |
2322 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | |
2323 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | |
2324 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy | |
2325 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | |
2326 \def\curfontsize{sec}% | |
2327 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% | |
2328 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} | |
2329 \def\subsecfonts{% | |
2330 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | |
2331 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | |
2332 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy | |
2333 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | |
2334 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% | |
2335 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% | |
2336 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} | |
2337 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts | |
2338 \def\reducedfonts{% | |
2339 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | |
2340 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | |
2341 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | |
2342 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | |
2343 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% | |
2344 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
2345 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
2346 \def\smallfonts{% | |
2347 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | |
2348 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | |
2349 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | |
2350 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | |
2351 \def\curfontsize{small}% | |
2352 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
2353 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
2354 \def\smallerfonts{% | |
2355 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | |
2356 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | |
2357 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | |
2358 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | |
2359 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% | |
2360 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
2361 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} | |
2362 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2363 % Fonts for short table of contents. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2364 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2365 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2366 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2367 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2368 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2369 % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2370 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2371 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2372 |
84318 | 2373 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. |
2374 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | |
2375 | |
2376 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | |
2377 % can fit this many characters: | |
2378 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 | |
2379 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | |
2380 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 | |
2381 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | |
2382 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. | |
2383 % | |
2384 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | |
2385 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 | |
2386 % --karl, 24jan03. | |
2387 | |
2388 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | |
2389 % | |
2390 \definetextfontsizexi | |
2391 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2392 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2393 \message{markup,} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2394 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2395 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2396 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2397 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2398 % this property, we can check that font parameter. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2399 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2400 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2401 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2402 % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2403 % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2404 % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2405 % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2406 % currently in effect. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2407 \newif\ifmarkupvar |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2408 \newif\ifmarkupsamp |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2409 \newif\ifmarkupkey |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2410 %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2411 %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2412 \newif\ifmarkupcode |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2413 \newif\ifmarkupkbd |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2414 %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2415 %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2416 \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2417 \newif\ifmarkupexample |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2418 \newif\ifmarkupverb |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2419 \newif\ifmarkupverbatim |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2420 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2421 \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2422 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2423 \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2424 \csname markup#1true\endcsname |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2425 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2426 \markupstylesetup |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2427 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2428 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2429 \let\markupstylesetup\empty |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2430 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2431 \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2432 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2433 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2434 \def#1% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2435 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2436 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2437 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2438 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2439 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2440 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2441 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2442 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2443 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2444 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2445 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2446 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2447 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2448 { |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2449 \catcode`\'=\active |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2450 \catcode`\`=\active |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2451 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2452 \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2453 \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2454 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2455 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2456 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2457 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2458 \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2459 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2460 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2461 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2462 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2463 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2464 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2465 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2466 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2467 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2468 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2469 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2470 \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2471 \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2472 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2473 % Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2474 % quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2475 % from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2476 % the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2477 % evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2478 % regular 0x27. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2479 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2480 \def\codequoteright{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2481 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2482 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2483 '% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2484 \else \char'15 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2485 \else \char'15 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2486 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2487 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2488 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2489 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2490 % the code environments to do likewise. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2491 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2492 \def\codequoteleft{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2493 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2494 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2495 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2496 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2497 \relax`% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2498 \else \char'22 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2499 \else \char'22 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2500 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2501 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2502 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2503 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} |
84318 | 2504 |
2505 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | |
2506 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | |
2507 | |
2508 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | |
2509 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | |
2510 | |
2511 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | |
2512 % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | |
2513 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else | |
2514 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} | |
2515 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2516 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2517 | |
2518 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. | |
2519 % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | |
2520 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2521 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2522 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want |
84318 | 2523 % ttsl for book titles, do we? |
2524 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2525 | |
2526 \let\i=\smartitalic | |
2527 \let\slanted=\smartslanted | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2528 \def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}} |
84318 | 2529 \let\dfn=\smartslanted |
2530 \let\emph=\smartitalic | |
2531 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2532 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2533 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2534 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2535 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2536 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2537 % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. |
84318 | 2538 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
2539 \let\strong=\b | |
2540 | |
2541 % @sansserif, explicit sans. | |
2542 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} | |
2543 | |
2544 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at | |
2545 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | |
2546 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | |
2547 % | |
2548 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | |
2549 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | |
2550 | |
2551 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. | |
2552 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | |
2553 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | |
2554 % | |
2555 \catcode`@=11 | |
2556 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% | |
2557 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | |
2558 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | |
2559 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends | |
2560 } | |
2561 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% | |
2562 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 | |
2563 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 | |
2564 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends | |
2565 } | |
2566 \catcode`@=\other | |
2567 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default | |
2568 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2569 % @t, explicit typewriter. |
84318 | 2570 \def\t#1{% |
2571 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% | |
2572 \null | |
2573 } | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2574 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2575 % @samp. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2576 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2577 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2578 % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2579 %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2580 %\font\keysy=cmsy9 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2581 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2582 % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2583 % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2584 % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2585 % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2586 % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2587 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2588 % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2589 % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2590 % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2591 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2592 \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2593 \nohyphenation |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2594 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2595 #1}\null} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2596 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2597 % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command. |
84318 | 2598 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
2599 | |
2600 % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | |
2601 \let\file=\samp | |
2602 \let\option=\samp | |
2603 | |
2604 % @code is a modification of @t, | |
2605 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | |
2606 \def\tclose#1{% | |
2607 {% | |
2608 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | |
2609 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | |
2610 % | |
2611 % Switch to typewriter. | |
2612 \tt | |
2613 % | |
2614 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | |
2615 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | |
2616 % | |
2617 % Turn off hyphenation. | |
2618 \nohyphenation | |
2619 % | |
2620 \rawbackslash | |
2621 \plainfrenchspacing | |
2622 #1% | |
2623 }% | |
2624 \null | |
2625 } | |
2626 | |
2627 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. | |
2628 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes | |
2629 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | |
2630 | |
2631 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | |
2632 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | |
2633 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | |
2634 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | |
2635 % -- rms. | |
2636 { | |
2637 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active | |
2638 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2639 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions |
84318 | 2640 % |
2641 \global\def\code{\begingroup | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2642 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2643 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. |
84318 | 2644 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active |
2645 \ifallowcodebreaks | |
2646 \let-\codedash | |
2647 \let_\codeunder | |
2648 \else | |
2649 \let-\realdash | |
2650 \let_\realunder | |
2651 \fi | |
2652 \codex | |
2653 } | |
2654 } | |
2655 | |
2656 \def\realdash{-} | |
2657 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | |
2658 \def\codeunder{% | |
2659 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ | |
2660 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | |
2661 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | |
2662 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | |
2663 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | |
2664 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | |
2665 \else\normalunderscore \fi | |
2666 \discretionary{}{}{}}% | |
2667 {\_}% | |
2668 } | |
2669 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} | |
2670 | |
2671 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., | |
2672 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in | |
2673 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in | |
2674 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2675 % |
84318 | 2676 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue |
2677 | |
2678 \def\keywordtrue{true} | |
2679 \def\keywordfalse{false} | |
2680 | |
2681 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% | |
2682 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2683 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue | |
2684 \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2685 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse | |
2686 \allowcodebreaksfalse | |
2687 \else | |
2688 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2689 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% | |
2690 \fi\fi | |
2691 } | |
2692 | |
2693 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, | |
2694 % then @kbd has no effect. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2695 \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}} |
84318 | 2696 |
2697 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | |
2698 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | |
2699 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | |
2700 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% | |
2701 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2702 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct | |
2703 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% | |
2704 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample | |
2705 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | |
2706 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode | |
2707 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | |
2708 \else | |
2709 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2710 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% | |
2711 \fi\fi\fi | |
2712 } | |
2713 \def\worddistinct{distinct} | |
2714 \def\wordexample{example} | |
2715 \def\wordcode{code} | |
2716 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2717 % Default is `distinct'. |
84318 | 2718 \kbdinputstyle distinct |
2719 | |
2720 \def\xkey{\key} | |
2721 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | |
2722 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2723 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2724 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi} |
84318 | 2725 |
2726 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. | |
2727 \let\indicateurl=\code | |
2728 \let\env=\code | |
2729 \let\command=\code | |
2730 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2731 % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2732 \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2733 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2734 % @clickstyle @arrow (by default) |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2735 \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2736 \def\click{\arrow} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2737 |
84318 | 2738 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) |
2739 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | |
2740 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | |
2741 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in | |
2742 % a hypertex \special here. | |
2743 % | |
2744 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | |
2745 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | |
2746 \unsepspaces | |
2747 \pdfurl{#1}% | |
2748 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
2749 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2750 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | |
2751 \else | |
2752 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2753 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2754 \ifpdf | |
2755 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | |
2756 \else | |
2757 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | |
2758 \fi | |
2759 \else | |
2760 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | |
2761 \fi | |
2762 \fi | |
2763 \endlink | |
2764 \endgroup} | |
2765 | |
2766 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. | |
2767 % | |
2768 \let\url=\uref | |
2769 | |
2770 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. | |
2771 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | |
2772 % | |
2773 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} | |
2774 \ifpdf | |
2775 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | |
2776 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | |
2777 \unsepspaces | |
2778 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | |
2779 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2780 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | |
2781 \endlink | |
2782 \endgroup} | |
2783 \else | |
2784 \let\email=\uref | |
2785 \fi | |
2786 | |
2787 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the | |
2788 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | |
2789 % | |
2790 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | |
2791 | |
2792 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | |
2793 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for | |
2794 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. | |
2795 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | |
2796 | |
2797 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. | |
2798 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for | |
2799 % all-uppercase. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2800 % |
84318 | 2801 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} |
2802 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2803 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | |
2804 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2805 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2806 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2807 \fi | |
2808 } | |
2809 | |
2810 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. | |
2811 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2812 % |
84318 | 2813 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} |
2814 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2815 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% | |
2816 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2817 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2818 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2819 \fi | |
2820 } | |
2821 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2822 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2823 \message{glyphs,} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2824 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2825 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2826 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2827 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2828 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2829 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2830 \def\point{$\star$} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2831 \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2832 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2833 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2834 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2835 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2836 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2837 % The @error{} command. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2838 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2839 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2840 \newbox\errorbox |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2841 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2842 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2843 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2844 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2845 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2846 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2847 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2848 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2849 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2850 \vbox{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2851 \hrule height\dimen2 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2852 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2853 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2854 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2855 \hrule height\dimen2} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2856 \hfil} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2857 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2858 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2859 |
84318 | 2860 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. |
2861 % | |
2862 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} | |
2863 | |
2864 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. | |
2865 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik | |
2866 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and | |
2867 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). | |
2868 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2869 % |
84318 | 2870 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore |
2871 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular | |
2872 % font height. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2873 % |
84318 | 2874 % feymr - regular |
2875 % feymo - slanted | |
2876 % feybr - bold | |
2877 % feybo - bold slanted | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2878 % |
84318 | 2879 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. |
2880 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. | |
2881 % Hmm. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2882 % |
84318 | 2883 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? |
2884 % Hope not. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2885 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2886 % |
84318 | 2887 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} |
2888 \def\eurofont{% | |
2889 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in | |
2890 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that | |
2891 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the | |
2892 % font installed. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2893 % |
84318 | 2894 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale |
2895 % that to the current nominal size. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2896 % |
84318 | 2897 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but |
2898 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2899 % |
84318 | 2900 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% |
2901 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2902 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename |
84318 | 2903 % bold: |
2904 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2905 \else |
84318 | 2906 % regular: |
2907 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize | |
2908 \fi | |
2909 \thiseurofont | |
2910 } | |
2911 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2912 % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2913 % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2914 % the redefinition. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2915 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2916 % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2917 \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2918 \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2919 \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2920 \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2921 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2922 \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2923 \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2924 \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2925 \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2926 \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2927 \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2928 \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2929 \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2930 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2931 % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2932 % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2933 % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2934 % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2935 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2936 % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2937 % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2938 % the same EC font. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2939 \def\ogonek#1{{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2940 \def\temp{#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2941 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2942 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2943 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2944 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2945 \else |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2946 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2947 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2948 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2949 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2950 \fi\fi\fi\fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2951 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2952 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2953 \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2954 \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2955 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2956 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2957 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2958 % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2959 \def\ecfont{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2960 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2961 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2962 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2963 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2964 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2965 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2966 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2967 % bold: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2968 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2969 \else |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2970 % regular: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2971 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2972 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2973 \thisecfont |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2974 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2975 |
84318 | 2976 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really |
2977 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | |
2978 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | |
2979 % | |
2980 \def\registeredsymbol{% | |
2981 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | |
2982 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | |
2983 }$% | |
2984 } | |
2985 | |
2986 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. | |
2987 % | |
2988 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} | |
2989 | |
2990 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: | |
2991 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 | |
2992 % so we'll define it if necessary. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2993 % |
84318 | 2994 \ifx\Orb\undefined |
2995 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} | |
2996 \fi | |
2997 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2998 % Quotes. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
2999 \chardef\quotedblleft="5C |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3000 \chardef\quotedblright=`\" |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3001 \chardef\quoteleft=`\` |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3002 \chardef\quoteright=`\' |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3003 |
84318 | 3004 |
3005 \message{page headings,} | |
3006 | |
3007 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | |
3008 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | |
3009 | |
3010 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | |
3011 \newif\ifseenauthor | |
3012 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | |
3013 | |
3014 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | |
3015 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | |
3016 % | |
3017 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
3018 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
3019 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
3020 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
3021 | |
3022 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% | |
3023 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} | |
3024 | |
3025 \envdef\titlepage{% | |
3026 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | |
3027 \begingroup | |
3028 \parindent=0pt \textfonts | |
3029 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | |
3030 \vglue\titlepagetopglue | |
3031 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | |
3032 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
3033 % | |
3034 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | |
3035 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. | |
3036 \let\oldpage = \page | |
3037 \def\page{% | |
3038 \iffinishedtitlepage\else | |
3039 \finishtitlepage | |
3040 \fi | |
3041 \let\page = \oldpage | |
3042 \page | |
3043 \null | |
3044 }% | |
3045 } | |
3046 | |
3047 \def\Etitlepage{% | |
3048 \iffinishedtitlepage\else | |
3049 \finishtitlepage | |
3050 \fi | |
3051 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | |
3052 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | |
3053 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | |
3054 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | |
3055 \oldpage | |
3056 \endgroup | |
3057 % | |
3058 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | |
3059 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | |
3060 \HEADINGSon | |
3061 % | |
3062 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | |
3063 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
3064 \shortcontents | |
3065 \contents | |
3066 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
3067 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
3068 \fi | |
3069 % | |
3070 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
3071 \contents | |
3072 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
3073 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
3074 \fi | |
3075 } | |
3076 | |
3077 \def\finishtitlepage{% | |
3078 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize | |
3079 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | |
3080 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
3081 } | |
3082 | |
3083 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: | |
3084 | |
3085 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | |
3086 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | |
3087 | |
3088 \parseargdef\title{% | |
3089 \checkenv\titlepage | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3090 \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1} |
84318 | 3091 % print a rule at the page bottom also. |
3092 \finishedtitlepagefalse | |
3093 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | |
3094 } | |
3095 | |
3096 \parseargdef\subtitle{% | |
3097 \checkenv\titlepage | |
3098 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | |
3099 } | |
3100 | |
3101 % @author should come last, but may come many times. | |
3102 % It can also be used inside @quotation. | |
3103 % | |
3104 \parseargdef\author{% | |
3105 \def\temp{\quotation}% | |
3106 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
3107 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | |
3108 \else | |
3109 \checkenv\titlepage | |
3110 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3111 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% |
84318 | 3112 \fi |
3113 } | |
3114 | |
3115 | |
3116 %%% Set up page headings and footings. | |
3117 | |
3118 \let\thispage=\folio | |
3119 | |
3120 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages | |
3121 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages | |
3122 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages | |
3123 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages | |
3124 | |
3125 % Now make TeX use those variables | |
3126 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline | |
3127 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | |
3128 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | |
3129 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | |
3130 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | |
3131 | |
3132 % Commands to set those variables. | |
3133 % For example, this is what @headings on does | |
3134 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | |
3135 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | |
3136 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | |
3137 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | |
3138 | |
3139 | |
3140 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} | |
3141 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
3142 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
3143 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
3144 | |
3145 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} | |
3146 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
3147 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
3148 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
3149 | |
3150 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | |
3151 | |
3152 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | |
3153 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
3154 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
3155 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
3156 | |
3157 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} | |
3158 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
3159 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
3160 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% | |
3161 % | |
3162 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume | |
3163 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | |
3164 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt | |
3165 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt | |
3166 } | |
3167 | |
3168 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} | |
3169 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3170 % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3171 % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3172 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3173 % The same set of arguments for: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3174 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3175 % @oddheadingmarks |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3176 % @evenfootingmarks |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3177 % @oddfootingmarks |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3178 % @everyheadingmarks |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3179 % @everyfootingmarks |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3180 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3181 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3182 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3183 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3184 \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3185 \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3186 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3187 \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3188 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3189 % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3190 \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3191 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3192 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3193 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3194 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3195 \everyheadingmarks bottom |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3196 \everyfootingmarks bottom |
84318 | 3197 |
3198 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. | |
3199 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. | |
3200 % @headings off turns them off. | |
3201 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | |
3202 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
3203 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
3204 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | |
3205 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | |
3206 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | |
3207 | |
3208 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | |
3209 | |
3210 \def\HEADINGSoff{% | |
3211 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
3212 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | |
3213 \HEADINGSoff | |
3214 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | |
3215 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | |
3216 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | |
3217 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | |
3218 % edge of all pages. | |
3219 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% | |
3220 \global\pageno=1 | |
3221 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
3222 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
3223 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
3224 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
3225 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
3226 } | |
3227 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
3228 | |
3229 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | |
3230 % page number on top right. | |
3231 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% | |
3232 \global\pageno=1 | |
3233 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
3234 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
3235 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
3236 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
3237 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
3238 } | |
3239 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | |
3240 | |
3241 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | |
3242 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | |
3243 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | |
3244 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
3245 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
3246 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
3247 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
3248 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
3249 } | |
3250 | |
3251 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | |
3252 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | |
3253 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
3254 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
3255 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
3256 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
3257 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
3258 } | |
3259 | |
3260 % Subroutines used in generating headings | |
3261 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | |
3262 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | |
3263 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | |
3264 \ifx\today\undefined | |
3265 \def\today{% | |
3266 \number\day\space | |
3267 \ifcase\month | |
3268 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | |
3269 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | |
3270 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | |
3271 \fi | |
3272 \space\number\year} | |
3273 \fi | |
3274 | |
3275 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. | |
3276 % It generates no output of its own. | |
3277 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | |
3278 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} | |
3279 | |
3280 | |
3281 \message{tables,} | |
3282 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). | |
3283 | |
3284 % default indentation of table text | |
3285 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | |
3286 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | |
3287 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in | |
3288 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | |
3289 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in | |
3290 | |
3291 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | |
3292 \newdimen\itemmax | |
3293 | |
3294 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with | |
3295 % these defs. | |
3296 % They also define \itemindex | |
3297 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | |
3298 | |
3299 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | |
3300 | |
3301 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | |
3302 | |
3303 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
3304 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
3305 | |
3306 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | |
3307 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
3308 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | |
3309 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% | |
3310 \itemindex{#1}% | |
3311 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | |
3312 % | |
3313 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | |
3314 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | |
3315 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | |
3316 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | |
3317 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | |
3318 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | |
3319 % | |
3320 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | |
3321 % but leave it ragged-right. | |
3322 \begingroup | |
3323 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | |
3324 \advance\hsize by\tableindent | |
3325 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | |
3326 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | |
3327 \endgroup | |
3328 % | |
3329 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | |
3330 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | |
3331 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | |
3332 % | |
3333 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if | |
3334 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no | |
3335 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would | |
3336 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this | |
3337 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert | |
3338 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3339 % |
84318 | 3340 \penalty 10001 |
3341 \endgroup | |
3342 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | |
3343 \else | |
3344 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the | |
3345 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | |
3346 \noindent | |
3347 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | |
3348 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | |
3349 % eventually be printed. | |
3350 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | |
3351 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | |
3352 \unhbox0 | |
3353 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | |
3354 \endgroup | |
3355 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | |
3356 \fi | |
3357 } | |
3358 | |
3359 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} | |
3360 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | |
3361 | |
3362 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | |
3363 \envdef\table{% | |
3364 \let\itemindex\gobble | |
3365 \tablecheck{table}% | |
3366 } | |
3367 \envdef\ftable{% | |
3368 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | |
3369 \tablecheck{ftable}% | |
3370 } | |
3371 \envdef\vtable{% | |
3372 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | |
3373 \tablecheck{vtable}% | |
3374 } | |
3375 \def\tablecheck#1{% | |
3376 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active | |
3377 \endgroup | |
3378 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is | |
3379 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
3380 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% | |
3381 \else | |
3382 \let\next\tablex | |
3383 \fi | |
3384 \next | |
3385 } | |
3386 \def\tablex#1{% | |
3387 \def\itemindicate{#1}% | |
3388 \parsearg\tabley | |
3389 } | |
3390 \def\tabley#1{% | |
3391 {% | |
3392 \makevalueexpandable | |
3393 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | |
3394 \expandafter | |
3395 }\temp \endtablez | |
3396 } | |
3397 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | |
3398 \aboveenvbreak | |
3399 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | |
3400 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | |
3401 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | |
3402 \itemmax=\tableindent | |
3403 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
3404 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | |
3405 \exdentamount=\tableindent | |
3406 \parindent = 0pt | |
3407 \parskip = \smallskipamount | |
3408 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
3409 \let\item = \internalBitem | |
3410 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | |
3411 } | |
3412 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | |
3413 \let\Eftable\Etable | |
3414 \let\Evtable\Etable | |
3415 \let\Eitemize\Etable | |
3416 \let\Eenumerate\Etable | |
3417 | |
3418 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | |
3419 | |
3420 \newcount \itemno | |
3421 | |
3422 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} | |
3423 | |
3424 \def\doitemize#1{% | |
3425 \aboveenvbreak | |
3426 \itemmax=\itemindent | |
3427 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
3428 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | |
3429 \exdentamount=\itemindent | |
3430 \parindent=0pt | |
3431 \parskip=\smallskipamount | |
3432 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3433 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3434 % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3435 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3436 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3437 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3438 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. |
84318 | 3439 \def\itemcontents{#1}% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3440 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3441 % |
84318 | 3442 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. |
3443 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3444 % |
84318 | 3445 \let\item=\itemizeitem |
3446 } | |
3447 | |
3448 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. | |
3449 % | |
3450 \def\itemizeitem{% | |
3451 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations | |
3452 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | |
3453 {% | |
3454 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | |
3455 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | |
3456 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero | |
3457 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the | |
3458 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | |
3459 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | |
3460 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least | |
3461 % that's the theory. | |
3462 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | |
3463 \noindent | |
3464 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3465 % |
84318 | 3466 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. |
3467 \flushcr | |
3468 } | |
3469 | |
3470 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | |
3471 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | |
3472 % | |
3473 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | |
3474 | |
3475 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | |
3476 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No | |
3477 % argument is the same as `1'. | |
3478 % | |
3479 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} | |
3480 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% | |
3481 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | |
3482 \def\thearg{#1}% | |
3483 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | |
3484 % | |
3485 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a | |
3486 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | |
3487 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | |
3488 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | |
3489 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | |
3490 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | |
3491 \ifx\rest\empty | |
3492 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. | |
3493 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | |
3494 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | |
3495 % not equal to itself. | |
3496 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | |
3497 % | |
3498 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | |
3499 % continuing to look for a <number>. | |
3500 % | |
3501 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | |
3502 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | |
3503 \else | |
3504 % It's a letter. | |
3505 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | |
3506 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | |
3507 \else | |
3508 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | |
3509 \fi | |
3510 \fi | |
3511 \else | |
3512 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. | |
3513 \numericenumerate | |
3514 \fi | |
3515 } | |
3516 | |
3517 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is | |
3518 % given in \thearg. | |
3519 % | |
3520 \def\numericenumerate{% | |
3521 \itemno = \thearg | |
3522 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | |
3523 } | |
3524 | |
3525 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
3526 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | |
3527 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
3528 \startenumeration{% | |
3529 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
3530 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
3531 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
3532 alphabet}% | |
3533 \fi | |
3534 \char\lccode\itemno | |
3535 }% | |
3536 } | |
3537 | |
3538 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
3539 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | |
3540 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
3541 \startenumeration{% | |
3542 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
3543 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
3544 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
3545 alphabet} | |
3546 \fi | |
3547 \char\uccode\itemno | |
3548 }% | |
3549 } | |
3550 | |
3551 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the | |
3552 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in | |
3553 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | |
3554 % | |
3555 \def\startenumeration#1{% | |
3556 \advance\itemno by -1 | |
3557 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr | |
3558 } | |
3559 | |
3560 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | |
3561 % to @enumerate. | |
3562 % | |
3563 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | |
3564 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | |
3565 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
3566 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
3567 | |
3568 | |
3569 % @multitable macros | |
3570 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | |
3571 % | |
3572 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | |
3573 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width | |
3574 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | |
3575 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | |
3576 | |
3577 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | |
3578 | |
3579 % To make preamble: | |
3580 % | |
3581 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | |
3582 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | |
3583 % @item ... | |
3584 % | |
3585 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | |
3586 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | |
3587 % columns as desired. | |
3588 | |
3589 | |
3590 % Or use a template: | |
3591 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
3592 % @item ... | |
3593 % using the widest term desired in each column. | |
3594 | |
3595 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | |
3596 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | |
3597 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | |
3598 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | |
3599 | |
3600 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt | |
3601 % if they are. | |
3602 | |
3603 % Sample multitable: | |
3604 | |
3605 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
3606 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | |
3607 % @item | |
3608 % first col stuff | |
3609 % @tab | |
3610 % second col stuff | |
3611 % @tab | |
3612 % third col | |
3613 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | |
3614 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | |
3615 % | |
3616 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | |
3617 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | |
3618 % @end multitable | |
3619 | |
3620 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | |
3621 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | |
3622 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | |
3623 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | |
3624 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | |
3625 % to baseline. | |
3626 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | |
3627 % | |
3628 \newskip\multitableparskip | |
3629 \newskip\multitableparindent | |
3630 \newdimen\multitablecolspace | |
3631 \newskip\multitablelinespace | |
3632 \multitableparskip=0pt | |
3633 \multitableparindent=6pt | |
3634 \multitablecolspace=12pt | |
3635 \multitablelinespace=0pt | |
3636 | |
3637 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | |
3638 % | |
3639 \let\endsetuptable\relax | |
3640 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | |
3641 \let\columnfractions\relax | |
3642 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | |
3643 \newif\ifsetpercent | |
3644 | |
3645 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might | |
3646 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. | |
3647 % | |
3648 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% | |
3649 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
3650 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% | |
3651 \setuptable | |
3652 } | |
3653 | |
3654 \newcount\colcount | |
3655 \def\setuptable#1{% | |
3656 \def\firstarg{#1}% | |
3657 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | |
3658 \let\go = \relax | |
3659 \else | |
3660 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | |
3661 \global\setpercenttrue | |
3662 \else | |
3663 \ifsetpercent | |
3664 \let\go\pickupwholefraction | |
3665 \else | |
3666 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
3667 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a | |
3668 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | |
3669 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% | |
3670 \fi | |
3671 \fi | |
3672 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | |
3673 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | |
3674 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | |
3675 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | |
3676 \else | |
3677 \let\go = \setuptable | |
3678 \fi% | |
3679 \fi | |
3680 \go | |
3681 } | |
3682 | |
3683 % multitable-only commands. | |
3684 % | |
3685 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | |
3686 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3687 % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3688 % undo it ourselves. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3689 \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3690 \def\headitem{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3691 \checkenv\multitable |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3692 \crcr |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3693 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3694 \the\everytab % for the first item |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3695 }% |
84318 | 3696 % |
3697 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template | |
3698 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
3699 % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. |
84318 | 3700 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. |
3701 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | |
3702 | |
3703 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | |
3704 % | |
3705 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. | |
3706 % | |
3707 \envdef\multitable{% | |
3708 \vskip\parskip | |
3709 \startsavinginserts | |
3710 % | |
3711 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | |
3712 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries | |
3713 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka | |
3714 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. | |
3715 \def\item{\crcr}% | |
3716 % | |
3717 \tolerance=9500 | |
3718 \hbadness=9500 | |
3719 \setmultitablespacing | |
3720 \parskip=\multitableparskip | |
3721 \parindent=\multitableparindent | |
3722 \overfullrule=0pt | |
3723 \global\colcount=0 | |
3724 % | |
3725 \everycr = {% | |
3726 \noalign{% | |
3727 \global\everytab={}% | |
3728 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | |
3729 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | |
3730 \checkinserts | |
3731 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | |
3732 %\filbreak | |
3733 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | |
3734 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the | |
3735 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | |
3736 }% | |
3737 }% | |
3738 % | |
3739 \parsearg\domultitable | |
3740 } | |
3741 \def\domultitable#1{% | |
3742 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: | |
3743 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | |
3744 % | |
3745 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | |
3746 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | |
3747 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | |
3748 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | |
3749 \halign\bgroup &% | |
3750 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
3751 \multistrut | |
3752 \vtop{% | |
3753 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | |
3754 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | |
3755 % | |
3756 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | |
3757 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | |
3758 % the first one. | |
3759 % | |
3760 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | |
3761 % to the width of each template entry. | |
3762 % | |
3763 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | |
3764 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | |
3765 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at | |
3766 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | |
3767 % | |
3768 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | |
3769 \rightskip=0pt | |
3770 \ifnum\colcount=1 | |
3771 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | |
3772 \advance\hsize by\leftskip | |
3773 \else | |
3774 \ifsetpercent \else | |
3775 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | |
3776 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | |
3777 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | |
3778 \fi | |
3779 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | |
3780 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | |
3781 \fi | |
3782 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | |
3783 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | |
3784 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | |
3785 % For example: | |
3786 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | |
3787 % @item @code{#} | |
3788 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | |
3789 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | |
3790 % marking characters. | |
3791 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | |
3792 }\cr | |
3793 } | |
3794 \def\Emultitable{% | |
3795 \crcr | |
3796 \egroup % end the \halign | |
3797 \global\setpercentfalse | |
3798 } | |
3799 | |
3800 \def\setmultitablespacing{% | |
3801 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing | |
3802 % | |
3803 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in | |
3804 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on | |
3805 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. | |
3806 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. | |
3807 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt | |
3808 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | |
3809 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | |
3810 \fi | |
3811 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of | |
3812 %% table. If not, do nothing. | |
3813 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | |
3814 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | |
3815 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3816 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3817 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3818 \fi% | |
3819 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | |
3820 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3821 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3822 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3823 \fi} | |
3824 | |
3825 | |
3826 \message{conditionals,} | |
3827 | |
3828 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | |
3829 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't | |
3830 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we | |
3831 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | |
3832 % attempt to close an environment group. | |
3833 % | |
3834 \def\makecond#1{% | |
3835 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | |
3836 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | |
3837 } | |
3838 \makecond{iftex} | |
3839 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | |
3840 \makecond{ifnothtml} | |
3841 \makecond{ifnotinfo} | |
3842 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | |
3843 \makecond{ifnotxml} | |
3844 | |
3845 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. | |
3846 % | |
3847 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | |
3848 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | |
3849 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | |
3850 \def\html{\doignore{html}} | |
3851 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | |
3852 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} | |
3853 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} | |
3854 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} | |
3855 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} | |
3856 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} | |
3857 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | |
3858 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} | |
3859 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} | |
3860 | |
3861 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. | |
3862 % | |
3863 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. | |
3864 \newcount\doignorecount | |
3865 | |
3866 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup | |
3867 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: | |
3868 \obeylines | |
3869 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
3870 \catcode`\{ = \other | |
3871 \catcode`\} = \other | |
3872 % | |
3873 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | |
3874 \spaceisspace | |
3875 % | |
3876 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | |
3877 \doignorecount = 0 | |
3878 % | |
3879 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | |
3880 \dodoignore{#1}% | |
3881 } | |
3882 | |
3883 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. | |
3884 \obeylines % | |
3885 % | |
3886 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% | |
3887 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. | |
3888 % | |
3889 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. | |
3890 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% | |
3891 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | |
3892 % | |
3893 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | |
3894 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | |
3895 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | |
3896 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | |
3897 % | |
3898 % And now expand that command. | |
3899 \doignoretext ^^M% | |
3900 }% | |
3901 } | |
3902 | |
3903 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | |
3904 \def\temp{#1}% | |
3905 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. | |
3906 \let\next\doignoretextzzz | |
3907 \else % Found a nested condition, ... | |
3908 \advance\doignorecount by 1 | |
3909 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. | |
3910 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | |
3911 \fi | |
3912 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. | |
3913 } | |
3914 | |
3915 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | |
3916 % | |
3917 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | |
3918 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. | |
3919 \let\next\enddoignore | |
3920 \else % Still inside a nested condition. | |
3921 \advance\doignorecount by -1 | |
3922 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. | |
3923 \fi | |
3924 \next | |
3925 } | |
3926 | |
3927 % Finish off ignored text. | |
3928 { \obeylines% | |
3929 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim | |
3930 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional | |
3931 % would result in a blank line in the output. | |
3932 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% | |
3933 } | |
3934 | |
3935 | |
3936 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | |
3937 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | |
3938 % | |
3939 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | |
3940 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | |
3941 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | |
3942 % didn't need it. | |
3943 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | |
3944 % | |
3945 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | |
3946 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% | |
3947 {% | |
3948 \makevalueexpandable | |
3949 \def\temp{#2}% | |
3950 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | |
3951 \ifx\temp\empty | |
3952 \next{}% | |
3953 \else | |
3954 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | |
3955 \fi | |
3956 }% | |
3957 } | |
3958 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | |
3959 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | |
3960 | |
3961 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | |
3962 % | |
3963 \parseargdef\clear{% | |
3964 {% | |
3965 \makevalueexpandable | |
3966 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | |
3967 }% | |
3968 } | |
3969 | |
3970 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | |
3971 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} | |
3972 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | |
3973 { | |
3974 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active | |
3975 % | |
3976 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% | |
3977 \let\value = \expandablevalue | |
3978 % We don't want these characters active, ... | |
3979 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | |
3980 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | |
3981 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | |
3982 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | |
3983 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | |
3984 } | |
3985 } | |
3986 | |
3987 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | |
3988 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). | |
3989 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | |
3990 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the | |
3991 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | |
3992 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | |
3993 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | |
3994 % | |
3995 \def\expandablevalue#1{% | |
3996 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | |
3997 {[No value for ``#1'']}% | |
3998 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% | |
3999 \else | |
4000 \csname SET#1\endcsname | |
4001 \fi | |
4002 } | |
4003 | |
4004 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | |
4005 % with @set. | |
4006 % | |
4007 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. | |
4008 % | |
4009 \makecond{ifset} | |
4010 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | |
4011 \def\doifset#1#2{% | |
4012 {% | |
4013 \makevalueexpandable | |
4014 \let\next=\empty | |
4015 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | |
4016 #1% If not set, redefine \next. | |
4017 \fi | |
4018 \expandafter | |
4019 }\next | |
4020 } | |
4021 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | |
4022 | |
4023 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | |
4024 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | |
4025 % | |
4026 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the | |
4027 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | |
4028 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | |
4029 % | |
4030 \makecond{ifclear} | |
4031 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | |
4032 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | |
4033 | |
4034 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file | |
4035 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. | |
4036 \let\dircategory=\comment | |
4037 | |
4038 % @defininfoenclose. | |
4039 \let\definfoenclose=\comment | |
4040 | |
4041 | |
4042 \message{indexing,} | |
4043 % Index generation facilities | |
4044 | |
4045 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | |
4046 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. | |
4047 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} | |
4048 | |
4049 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | |
4050 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | |
4051 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | |
4052 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | |
4053 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. | |
4054 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | |
4055 % for the sake of vms. | |
4056 % | |
4057 \def\newindex#1{% | |
4058 \iflinks | |
4059 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
4060 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | |
4061 \fi | |
4062 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index | |
4063 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | |
4064 } | |
4065 | |
4066 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} | |
4067 % | |
4068 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | |
4069 | |
4070 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | |
4071 % | |
4072 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | |
4073 % | |
4074 \def\newcodeindex#1{% | |
4075 \iflinks | |
4076 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
4077 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | |
4078 \fi | |
4079 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | |
4080 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | |
4081 } | |
4082 | |
4083 | |
4084 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. | |
4085 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | |
4086 % | |
4087 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo | |
4088 % inside @code. | |
4089 % | |
4090 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} | |
4091 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | |
4092 | |
4093 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | |
4094 % #3 the target index (bar). | |
4095 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | |
4096 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | |
4097 % closing the target index. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4098 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax |
84318 | 4099 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the |
4100 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | |
4101 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4102 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 |
84318 | 4103 \fi |
4104 % redefine \fooindfile: | |
4105 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | |
4106 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | |
4107 % redefine \fooindex: | |
4108 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | |
4109 } | |
4110 | |
4111 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | |
4112 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | |
4113 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. | |
4114 | |
4115 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | |
4116 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | |
4117 | |
4118 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | |
4119 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | |
4120 | |
4121 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | |
4122 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | |
4123 | |
4124 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | |
4125 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | |
4126 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | |
4127 | |
4128 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. | |
4129 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | |
4130 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | |
4131 % | |
4132 \def\indexdummies{% | |
4133 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. | |
4134 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | |
4135 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | |
4136 % | |
4137 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | |
4138 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | |
4139 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | |
4140 \let\{ = \mylbrace | |
4141 \let\} = \myrbrace | |
4142 % | |
4143 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is | |
4144 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts | |
4145 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, | |
4146 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput | |
4147 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput | |
4148 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that | |
4149 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it | |
4150 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that | |
4151 % is still getting written without apparent harm. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4152 % |
84318 | 4153 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to |
4154 % help-texinfo, 22may06): | |
4155 % @macro funindex {WORD} | |
4156 % @findex xyz | |
4157 % @end macro | |
4158 % ... | |
4159 % @funindex commtest | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4160 % |
84318 | 4161 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4162 % |
84318 | 4163 % Sample whatsit resulting: |
4164 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4165 % |
84318 | 4166 % So: |
4167 \let\endinput = \empty | |
4168 % | |
4169 % Do the redefinitions. | |
4170 \commondummies | |
4171 } | |
4172 | |
4173 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to | |
4174 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of | |
4175 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, | |
4176 % this will be simpler. | |
4177 % | |
4178 \def\atdummies{% | |
4179 \def\@{@@}% | |
4180 \def\ {@ }% | |
4181 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | |
4182 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | |
4183 % | |
4184 % Do the redefinitions. | |
4185 \commondummies | |
4186 \otherbackslash | |
4187 } | |
4188 | |
4189 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. | |
4190 % | |
4191 \def\commondummies{% | |
4192 % | |
4193 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively | |
4194 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, | |
4195 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for | |
4196 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | |
4197 % from whatever follows. | |
4198 % | |
4199 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | |
4200 % space. | |
4201 % | |
4202 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | |
4203 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | |
4204 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | |
4205 % | |
4206 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% | |
4207 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% | |
4208 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter | |
4209 % | |
4210 \commondummiesnofonts | |
4211 % | |
4212 \definedummyletter\_% | |
4213 % | |
4214 % Non-English letters. | |
4215 \definedummyword\AA | |
4216 \definedummyword\AE | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4217 \definedummyword\DH |
84318 | 4218 \definedummyword\L |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4219 \definedummyword\O |
84318 | 4220 \definedummyword\OE |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4221 \definedummyword\TH |
84318 | 4222 \definedummyword\aa |
4223 \definedummyword\ae | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4224 \definedummyword\dh |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4225 \definedummyword\exclamdown |
84318 | 4226 \definedummyword\l |
4227 \definedummyword\o | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4228 \definedummyword\oe |
84318 | 4229 \definedummyword\ordf |
4230 \definedummyword\ordm | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4231 \definedummyword\questiondown |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4232 \definedummyword\ss |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4233 \definedummyword\th |
84318 | 4234 % |
4235 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | |
4236 \definedummyword\bf | |
4237 \definedummyword\gtr | |
4238 \definedummyword\hat | |
4239 \definedummyword\less | |
4240 \definedummyword\sf | |
4241 \definedummyword\sl | |
4242 \definedummyword\tclose | |
4243 \definedummyword\tt | |
4244 % | |
4245 \definedummyword\LaTeX | |
4246 \definedummyword\TeX | |
4247 % | |
4248 % Assorted special characters. | |
4249 \definedummyword\bullet | |
4250 \definedummyword\comma | |
4251 \definedummyword\copyright | |
4252 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol | |
4253 \definedummyword\dots | |
4254 \definedummyword\enddots | |
4255 \definedummyword\equiv | |
4256 \definedummyword\error | |
4257 \definedummyword\euro | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4258 \definedummyword\guillemetleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4259 \definedummyword\guillemetright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4260 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4261 \definedummyword\guilsinglright |
84318 | 4262 \definedummyword\expansion |
4263 \definedummyword\minus | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4264 \definedummyword\ogonek |
84318 | 4265 \definedummyword\pounds |
4266 \definedummyword\point | |
4267 \definedummyword\print | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4268 \definedummyword\quotedblbase |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4269 \definedummyword\quotedblleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4270 \definedummyword\quotedblright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4271 \definedummyword\quoteleft |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4272 \definedummyword\quoteright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4273 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase |
84318 | 4274 \definedummyword\result |
4275 \definedummyword\textdegree | |
4276 % | |
4277 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. | |
4278 \macrolist | |
4279 % | |
4280 \normalturnoffactive | |
4281 % | |
4282 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | |
4283 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | |
4284 \makevalueexpandable | |
4285 } | |
4286 | |
4287 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | |
4288 % | |
4289 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% | |
4290 % Control letters and accents. | |
4291 \definedummyletter\!% | |
4292 \definedummyaccent\"% | |
4293 \definedummyaccent\'% | |
4294 \definedummyletter\*% | |
4295 \definedummyaccent\,% | |
4296 \definedummyletter\.% | |
4297 \definedummyletter\/% | |
4298 \definedummyletter\:% | |
4299 \definedummyaccent\=% | |
4300 \definedummyletter\?% | |
4301 \definedummyaccent\^% | |
4302 \definedummyaccent\`% | |
4303 \definedummyaccent\~% | |
4304 \definedummyword\u | |
4305 \definedummyword\v | |
4306 \definedummyword\H | |
4307 \definedummyword\dotaccent | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4308 \definedummyword\ogonek |
84318 | 4309 \definedummyword\ringaccent |
4310 \definedummyword\tieaccent | |
4311 \definedummyword\ubaraccent | |
4312 \definedummyword\udotaccent | |
4313 \definedummyword\dotless | |
4314 % | |
4315 % Texinfo font commands. | |
4316 \definedummyword\b | |
4317 \definedummyword\i | |
4318 \definedummyword\r | |
4319 \definedummyword\sc | |
4320 \definedummyword\t | |
4321 % | |
4322 % Commands that take arguments. | |
4323 \definedummyword\acronym | |
4324 \definedummyword\cite | |
4325 \definedummyword\code | |
4326 \definedummyword\command | |
4327 \definedummyword\dfn | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4328 \definedummyword\email |
84318 | 4329 \definedummyword\emph |
4330 \definedummyword\env | |
4331 \definedummyword\file | |
4332 \definedummyword\kbd | |
4333 \definedummyword\key | |
4334 \definedummyword\math | |
4335 \definedummyword\option | |
4336 \definedummyword\pxref | |
4337 \definedummyword\ref | |
4338 \definedummyword\samp | |
4339 \definedummyword\strong | |
4340 \definedummyword\tie | |
4341 \definedummyword\uref | |
4342 \definedummyword\url | |
4343 \definedummyword\var | |
4344 \definedummyword\verb | |
4345 \definedummyword\w | |
4346 \definedummyword\xref | |
4347 } | |
4348 | |
4349 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index | |
4350 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all | |
4351 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | |
4352 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | |
4353 % | |
4354 \def\indexnofonts{% | |
4355 % Accent commands should become @asis. | |
4356 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% | |
4357 % We can just ignore other control letters. | |
4358 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% | |
4359 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. | |
4360 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent | |
4361 % | |
4362 \commondummiesnofonts | |
4363 % | |
4364 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | |
4365 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | |
4366 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | |
4367 %\let\tt=\asis | |
4368 % | |
4369 \def\ { }% | |
4370 \def\@{@}% | |
4371 % how to handle braces? | |
4372 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | |
4373 % | |
4374 % Non-English letters. | |
4375 \def\AA{AA}% | |
4376 \def\AE{AE}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4377 \def\DH{DZZ}% |
84318 | 4378 \def\L{L}% |
4379 \def\OE{OE}% | |
4380 \def\O{O}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4381 \def\TH{ZZZ}% |
84318 | 4382 \def\aa{aa}% |
4383 \def\ae{ae}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4384 \def\dh{dzz}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4385 \def\exclamdown{!}% |
84318 | 4386 \def\l{l}% |
4387 \def\oe{oe}% | |
4388 \def\ordf{a}% | |
4389 \def\ordm{o}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4390 \def\o{o}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4391 \def\questiondown{?}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4392 \def\ss{ss}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4393 \def\th{zzz}% |
84318 | 4394 % |
4395 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | |
4396 \def\TeX{TeX}% | |
4397 % | |
4398 % Assorted special characters. | |
4399 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | |
4400 \def\bullet{bullet}% | |
4401 \def\comma{,}% | |
4402 \def\copyright{copyright}% | |
4403 \def\dots{...}% | |
4404 \def\enddots{...}% | |
4405 \def\equiv{==}% | |
4406 \def\error{error}% | |
4407 \def\euro{euro}% | |
4408 \def\expansion{==>}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4409 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4410 \def\guillemetright{>>}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4411 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4412 \def\guilsinglright{>}% |
84318 | 4413 \def\minus{-}% |
4414 \def\point{.}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4415 \def\pounds{pounds}% |
84318 | 4416 \def\print{-|}% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4417 \def\quotedblbase{"}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4418 \def\quotedblleft{"}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4419 \def\quotedblright{"}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4420 \def\quoteleft{`}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4421 \def\quoteright{'}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4422 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4423 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% |
84318 | 4424 \def\result{=>}% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4425 \def\textdegree{o}% |
84318 | 4426 % |
4427 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). | |
4428 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. | |
4429 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up | |
4430 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry | |
4431 % that starts with \. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4432 % |
84318 | 4433 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them |
4434 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that | |
4435 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4436 % |
84318 | 4437 \macrolist |
4438 } | |
4439 | |
4440 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. | |
4441 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | |
4442 | |
4443 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | |
4444 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. | |
4445 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | |
4446 | |
4447 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | |
4448 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | |
4449 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception | |
4450 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | |
4451 % | |
4452 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | |
4453 \iflinks | |
4454 {% | |
4455 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | |
4456 \toks0 = {#2}% | |
4457 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | |
4458 \def\thirdarg{#3}% | |
4459 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | |
4460 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | |
4461 \fi | |
4462 % | |
4463 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | |
4464 % | |
4465 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite | |
4466 }% | |
4467 \fi | |
4468 } | |
4469 | |
4470 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | |
4471 % | |
4472 \def\dosubindwrite{% | |
4473 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. | |
4474 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | |
4475 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% | |
4476 \fi | |
4477 % | |
4478 % Remember, we are within a group. | |
4479 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | |
4480 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | |
4481 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | |
4482 % | |
4483 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | |
4484 % get the string to sort by. | |
4485 {\indexnofonts | |
4486 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | |
4487 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | |
4488 }% | |
4489 % | |
4490 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | |
4491 % the original text, including any font commands. We write | |
4492 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | |
4493 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | |
4494 % sorted result. | |
4495 \edef\temp{% | |
4496 \write\writeto{% | |
4497 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | |
4498 }% | |
4499 \temp | |
4500 } | |
4501 | |
4502 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: | |
4503 % | |
4504 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | |
4505 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | |
4506 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | |
4507 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that | |
4508 % sequences like this: | |
4509 % @end defun | |
4510 % @tindex whatever | |
4511 % @defun ... | |
4512 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | |
4513 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | |
4514 % the previous defun. | |
4515 % | |
4516 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We | |
4517 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | |
4518 % | |
4519 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | |
4520 % | |
4521 % But wait, there is a catch there: | |
4522 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not | |
4523 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | |
4524 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual | |
4525 % representation of the skip. | |
4526 % | |
4527 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | |
4528 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | |
4529 % | |
4530 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | |
4531 % | |
4532 \newskip\whatsitskip | |
4533 \newcount\whatsitpenalty | |
4534 % | |
4535 % ..., ready, GO: | |
4536 % | |
4537 \def\safewhatsit#1{% | |
4538 \ifhmode | |
4539 #1% | |
4540 \else | |
4541 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. | |
4542 \whatsitskip = \lastskip | |
4543 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% | |
4544 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty | |
4545 % | |
4546 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | |
4547 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4548 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a |
84318 | 4549 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential |
4550 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | |
4551 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
4552 \else | |
4553 \vskip-\whatsitskip | |
4554 \fi | |
4555 % | |
4556 #1% | |
4557 % | |
4558 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
4559 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and | |
4560 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want | |
4561 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various | |
4562 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any | |
4563 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4564 % |
84318 | 4565 % @deffn deffn-whatever |
4566 % @vindex index-whatever | |
4567 % Description. | |
4568 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | |
4569 % and the "Description." paragraph. | |
4570 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi | |
4571 \else | |
4572 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | |
4573 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | |
4574 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | |
4575 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip | |
4576 \fi | |
4577 \fi | |
4578 } | |
4579 | |
4580 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | |
4581 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | |
4582 % or | |
4583 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | |
4584 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | |
4585 % containing these kinds of lines: | |
4586 % \initial {c} | |
4587 % before the first topic whose initial is c | |
4588 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} | |
4589 % for a topic that is used without subtopics | |
4590 % \primary {topic} | |
4591 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | |
4592 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | |
4593 % for each subtopic. | |
4594 | |
4595 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | |
4596 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | |
4597 | |
4598 \def\findex {\fnindex} | |
4599 \def\kindex {\kyindex} | |
4600 \def\cindex {\cpindex} | |
4601 \def\vindex {\vrindex} | |
4602 \def\tindex {\tpindex} | |
4603 \def\pindex {\pgindex} | |
4604 | |
4605 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | |
4606 {\obeylines % | |
4607 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | |
4608 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | |
4609 | |
4610 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | |
4611 | |
4612 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | |
4613 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | |
4614 % | |
4615 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup | |
4616 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% | |
4617 % | |
4618 \smallfonts \rm | |
4619 \tolerance = 9500 | |
4620 \plainfrenchspacing | |
4621 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. | |
4622 % | |
4623 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | |
4624 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | |
4625 % \initial {@} | |
4626 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | |
4627 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | |
4628 \catcode`\@ = 11 | |
4629 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | |
4630 \ifeof 1 | |
4631 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | |
4632 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | |
4633 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | |
4634 % there is some text. | |
4635 \putwordIndexNonexistent | |
4636 \else | |
4637 % | |
4638 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | |
4639 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | |
4640 % it can discover if there is anything in it. | |
4641 \read 1 to \temp | |
4642 \ifeof 1 | |
4643 \putwordIndexIsEmpty | |
4644 \else | |
4645 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | |
4646 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | |
4647 % to make right now. | |
4648 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% | |
4649 \catcode`\\ = 0 | |
4650 \escapechar = `\\ | |
4651 \begindoublecolumns | |
4652 \input \jobname.#1s | |
4653 \enddoublecolumns | |
4654 \fi | |
4655 \fi | |
4656 \closein 1 | |
4657 \endgroup} | |
4658 | |
4659 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | |
4660 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | |
4661 | |
4662 \def\initial#1{{% | |
4663 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | |
4664 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | |
4665 % | |
4666 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | |
4667 \removelastskip | |
4668 % | |
4669 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | |
4670 \nobreak | |
4671 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip | |
4672 \penalty 0 | |
4673 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip | |
4674 % | |
4675 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of | |
4676 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | |
4677 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | |
4678 % we need before each entry, but it's better. | |
4679 % | |
4680 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | |
4681 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | |
4682 \leftline{\secbf #1}% | |
4683 % Do our best not to break after the initial. | |
4684 \nobreak | |
4685 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip | |
4686 }} | |
4687 | |
4688 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and | |
4689 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index | |
4690 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | |
4691 % | |
4692 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: | |
4693 % \def\entry#1#2{... | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
4694 % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to |
84318 | 4695 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- |
4696 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | |
4697 % | |
4698 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. | |
4699 % --kasal, 21nov03 | |
4700 \def\entry{% | |
4701 \begingroup | |
4702 % | |
4703 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | |
4704 % affect previous text. | |
4705 \par | |
4706 % | |
4707 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | |
4708 \parfillskip = 0in | |
4709 % | |
4710 % No extra space above this paragraph. | |
4711 \parskip = 0in | |
4712 % | |
4713 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | |
4714 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | |
4715 % | |
4716 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | |
4717 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the | |
4718 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large | |
4719 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | |
4720 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | |
4721 % | |
4722 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | |
4723 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | |
4724 \hangindent = 2em | |
4725 % | |
4726 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | |
4727 % with blank space. | |
4728 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | |
4729 % | |
4730 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing | |
4731 % columns. | |
4732 \vskip 0pt plus1pt | |
4733 % | |
4734 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | |
4735 \afterassignment\doentry | |
4736 \let\temp = | |
4737 } | |
4738 \def\doentry{% | |
4739 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | |
4740 \noindent | |
4741 \aftergroup\finishentry | |
4742 % And now comes the text of the entry. | |
4743 } | |
4744 \def\finishentry#1{% | |
4745 % #1 is the page number. | |
4746 % | |
4747 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if | |
4748 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be | |
4749 % cursed by a Unix daemon. | |
4750 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% | |
4751 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt | |
4752 \ % | |
4753 \else | |
4754 % | |
4755 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | |
4756 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | |
4757 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | |
4758 \hfil\penalty50 | |
4759 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | |
4760 % | |
4761 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | |
4762 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull | |
4763 % \hbox ensues. | |
4764 \ifpdf | |
4765 \pdfgettoks#1.% | |
4766 \ \the\toksA | |
4767 \else | |
4768 \ #1% | |
4769 \fi | |
4770 \fi | |
4771 \par | |
4772 \endgroup | |
4773 } | |
4774 | |
4775 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. | |
4776 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | |
4777 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | |
4778 | |
4779 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | |
4780 | |
4781 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | |
4782 \def\secondary#1#2{{% | |
4783 \parfillskip=0in | |
4784 \parskip=0in | |
4785 \hangindent=1in | |
4786 \hangafter=1 | |
4787 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | |
4788 \ifpdf | |
4789 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | |
4790 \else | |
4791 #2 | |
4792 \fi | |
4793 \par | |
4794 }} | |
4795 | |
4796 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | |
4797 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | |
4798 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | |
4799 \catcode`\@=11 | |
4800 | |
4801 \newbox\partialpage | |
4802 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | |
4803 | |
4804 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | |
4805 % Grab any single-column material above us. | |
4806 \output = {% | |
4807 % | |
4808 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | |
4809 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | |
4810 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | |
4811 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In | |
4812 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | |
4813 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | |
4814 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. | |
4815 \ifvoid\partialpage \else | |
4816 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | |
4817 \fi | |
4818 % | |
4819 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | |
4820 % Unvbox the main output page. | |
4821 \unvbox\PAGE | |
4822 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | |
4823 }% | |
4824 }% | |
4825 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | |
4826 % | |
4827 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | |
4828 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | |
4829 % | |
4830 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this | |
4831 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | |
4832 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple | |
4833 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | |
4834 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | |
4835 % | |
4836 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | |
4837 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | |
4838 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant | |
4839 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | |
4840 % as it did when we hard-coded it. | |
4841 % | |
4842 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | |
4843 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | |
4844 % been clobbered. | |
4845 % | |
4846 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | |
4847 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | |
4848 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | |
4849 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4850 % | |
4851 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, | |
4852 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | |
4853 \vsize = 2\vsize | |
4854 } | |
4855 | |
4856 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | |
4857 % the last. | |
4858 % | |
4859 \def\doublecolumnout{% | |
4860 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | |
4861 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | |
4862 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | |
4863 % previous page. | |
4864 \dimen@ = \vsize | |
4865 \divide\dimen@ by 2 | |
4866 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | |
4867 % | |
4868 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | |
4869 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | |
4870 \onepageout\pagesofar | |
4871 \unvbox255 | |
4872 \penalty\outputpenalty | |
4873 } | |
4874 % | |
4875 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | |
4876 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | |
4877 \def\pagesofar{% | |
4878 \unvbox\partialpage | |
4879 % | |
4880 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4881 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | |
4882 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | |
4883 } | |
4884 % | |
4885 % All done with double columns. | |
4886 \def\enddoublecolumns{% | |
4887 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised | |
4888 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the | |
4889 % following situation: | |
4890 % | |
4891 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. | |
4892 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no | |
4893 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last | |
4894 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not | |
4895 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following | |
4896 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject | |
4897 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output | |
4898 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last | |
4899 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which | |
4900 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with | |
4901 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as | |
4902 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page | |
4903 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the | |
4904 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page | |
4905 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final | |
4906 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after | |
4907 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns | |
4908 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see | |
4909 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. | |
4910 % | |
4911 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the | |
4912 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). | |
4913 \penalty0 | |
4914 % | |
4915 \output = {% | |
4916 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the | |
4917 % current page, no automatic page break. | |
4918 \balancecolumns | |
4919 % | |
4920 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | |
4921 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | |
4922 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | |
4923 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal | |
4924 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | |
4925 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | |
4926 % the output somewhat more palatable.) | |
4927 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | |
4928 }% | |
4929 \eject | |
4930 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | |
4931 % | |
4932 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | |
4933 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column | |
4934 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | |
4935 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | |
4936 \pagegoal = \vsize | |
4937 } | |
4938 % | |
4939 % Called at the end of the double column material. | |
4940 \def\balancecolumns{% | |
4941 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | |
4942 \dimen@ = \ht0 | |
4943 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | |
4944 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | |
4945 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | |
4946 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | |
4947 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
4948 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | |
4949 {% | |
4950 \vbadness = 10000 | |
4951 \loop | |
4952 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | |
4953 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | |
4954 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | |
4955 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | |
4956 \repeat | |
4957 }% | |
4958 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | |
4959 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | |
4960 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | |
4961 % | |
4962 \pagesofar | |
4963 } | |
4964 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
4965 | |
4966 | |
4967 \message{sectioning,} | |
4968 % Chapters, sections, etc. | |
4969 | |
4970 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered | |
4971 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | |
4972 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter | |
4973 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 | |
4974 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | |
4975 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | |
4976 \newcount\chapno | |
4977 \newcount\secno \secno=0 | |
4978 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 | |
4979 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 | |
4980 | |
4981 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | |
4982 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ | |
4983 % | |
4984 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} | |
4985 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple | |
4986 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | |
4987 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. | |
4988 % | |
4989 \def\appendixletter{% | |
4990 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | |
4991 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | |
4992 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | |
4993 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | |
4994 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | |
4995 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | |
4996 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | |
4997 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | |
4998 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | |
4999 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | |
5000 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | |
5001 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | |
5002 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | |
5003 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | |
5004 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | |
5005 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | |
5006 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | |
5007 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | |
5008 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | |
5009 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | |
5010 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | |
5011 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | |
5012 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | |
5013 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | |
5014 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | |
5015 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | |
5016 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | |
5017 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not | |
5018 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | |
5019 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | |
5020 \else\char\the\appendixno | |
5021 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
5022 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
5023 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5024 % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5025 % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5026 % these. @section does likewise. |
84318 | 5027 \def\thischapter{} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5028 \def\thischapternum{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5029 \def\thischaptername{} |
84318 | 5030 \def\thissection{} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5031 \def\thissectionnum{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5032 \def\thissectionname{} |
84318 | 5033 |
5034 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | |
5035 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count | |
5036 | |
5037 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | |
5038 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | |
5039 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | |
5040 | |
5041 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | |
5042 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | |
5043 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | |
5044 | |
5045 % we only have subsub. | |
5046 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 | |
5047 % | |
5048 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. | |
5049 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: | |
5050 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel | |
5051 % | |
5052 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: | |
5053 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. | |
5054 \def\chapheadtype{N} | |
5055 | |
5056 % Choose a heading macro | |
5057 % #1 is heading type | |
5058 % #2 is heading level | |
5059 % #3 is text for heading | |
5060 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% | |
5061 % Compute the abs. sec. level: | |
5062 \absseclevel=#2 | |
5063 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase | |
5064 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: | |
5065 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 | |
5066 \absseclevel = 0 | |
5067 \else | |
5068 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 | |
5069 \absseclevel = 3 | |
5070 \fi | |
5071 \fi | |
5072 % The heading type: | |
5073 \def\headtype{#1}% | |
5074 \if \headtype U% | |
5075 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel | |
5076 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel | |
5077 \fi | |
5078 \else | |
5079 % Check for appendix sections: | |
5080 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 | |
5081 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% | |
5082 \else | |
5083 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% | |
5084 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% | |
5085 \fi\fi | |
5086 \fi | |
5087 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: | |
5088 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel | |
5089 \def\headtype{U}% | |
5090 \else | |
5091 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 | |
5092 \fi | |
5093 \fi | |
5094 % Now print the heading: | |
5095 \if \headtype U% | |
5096 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
5097 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% | |
5098 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% | |
5099 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
5100 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
5101 \fi | |
5102 \else | |
5103 \if \headtype A% | |
5104 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
5105 \appendixzzz{#3}% | |
5106 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% | |
5107 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% | |
5108 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
5109 \fi | |
5110 \else | |
5111 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
5112 \chapterzzz{#3}% | |
5113 \or \seczzz{#3}% | |
5114 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
5115 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
5116 \fi | |
5117 \fi | |
5118 \fi | |
5119 \suppressfirstparagraphindent | |
5120 } | |
5121 | |
5122 % an interface: | |
5123 \def\numhead{\genhead N} | |
5124 \def\apphead{\genhead A} | |
5125 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} | |
5126 | |
5127 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset | |
5128 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | |
5129 % | |
5130 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers | |
5131 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | |
5132 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
5133 % | |
5134 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | |
5135 \def\chapterzzz#1{% | |
5136 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | |
5137 % as an @include file. | |
5138 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
5139 \global\advance\chapno by 1 | |
5140 % | |
5141 % Used for \float. | |
5142 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | |
5143 \resetallfloatnos | |
5144 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5145 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5146 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5147 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% |
84318 | 5148 % |
5149 % Write the actual heading. | |
5150 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | |
5151 % | |
5152 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | |
5153 \global\let\section = \numberedsec | |
5154 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
5155 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
5156 } | |
5157 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5158 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5159 % |
84318 | 5160 \def\appendixzzz#1{% |
5161 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
5162 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | |
5163 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | |
5164 \resetallfloatnos | |
5165 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5166 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5167 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5168 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% |
84318 | 5169 % |
5170 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | |
5171 % | |
5172 \global\let\section = \appendixsec | |
5173 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | |
5174 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | |
5175 } | |
5176 | |
5177 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | |
5178 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | |
5179 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
5180 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | |
5181 % | |
5182 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | |
5183 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
5184 \resetallfloatnos | |
5185 % | |
5186 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | |
5187 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | |
5188 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | |
5189 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | |
5190 % to be executed, not expanded). | |
5191 % | |
5192 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | |
5193 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use | |
5194 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | |
5195 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for | |
5196 % the toc entries.) | |
5197 \toks0 = {#1}% | |
5198 \message{(\the\toks0)}% | |
5199 % | |
5200 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | |
5201 % | |
5202 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | |
5203 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | |
5204 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | |
5205 } | |
5206 | |
5207 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | |
5208 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% | |
5209 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break | |
5210 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. | |
5211 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 | |
5212 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters | |
5213 \unnmhead0{#1}% | |
5214 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
5215 } | |
5216 | |
5217 % @top is like @unnumbered. | |
5218 \let\top\unnumbered | |
5219 | |
5220 % Sections. | |
5221 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz | |
5222 \def\seczzz#1{% | |
5223 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
5224 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | |
5225 } | |
5226 | |
5227 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | |
5228 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | |
5229 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
5230 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | |
5231 } | |
5232 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | |
5233 | |
5234 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | |
5235 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | |
5236 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
5237 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | |
5238 } | |
5239 | |
5240 % Subsections. | |
5241 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz | |
5242 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
5243 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
5244 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
5245 } | |
5246 | |
5247 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | |
5248 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | |
5249 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
5250 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | |
5251 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
5252 } | |
5253 | |
5254 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | |
5255 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
5256 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
5257 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | |
5258 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
5259 } | |
5260 | |
5261 % Subsubsections. | |
5262 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz | |
5263 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
5264 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
5265 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | |
5266 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
5267 } | |
5268 | |
5269 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | |
5270 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
5271 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
5272 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | |
5273 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
5274 } | |
5275 | |
5276 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | |
5277 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
5278 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
5279 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | |
5280 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
5281 } | |
5282 | |
5283 % These macros control what the section commands do, according | |
5284 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | |
5285 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | |
5286 \let\section = \numberedsec | |
5287 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
5288 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
5289 | |
5290 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | |
5291 | |
5292 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | |
5293 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | |
5294 % overlong headings to fold. | |
5295 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | |
5296 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | |
5297 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | |
5298 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. | |
5299 | |
5300 \def\majorheading{% | |
5301 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | |
5302 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | |
5303 } | |
5304 | |
5305 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | |
5306 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | |
5307 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5308 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5309 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}% |
84318 | 5310 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax |
5311 \suppressfirstparagraphindent | |
5312 } | |
5313 | |
5314 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | |
5315 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
5316 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
5317 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
5318 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
5319 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
5320 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
5321 | |
5322 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | |
5323 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | |
5324 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | |
5325 | |
5326 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | |
5327 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | |
5328 | |
5329 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it | |
5330 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | |
5331 | |
5332 \newskip\chapheadingskip | |
5333 | |
5334 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | |
5335 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5336 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5337 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5338 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5339 \def\chapoddpage{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5340 \chappager |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5341 \ifodd\pageno \else |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5342 \begingroup |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5343 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5344 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5345 \hbox to 0pt{}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5346 \chappager |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5347 \endgroup |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5348 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5349 } |
84318 | 5350 |
5351 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | |
5352 | |
5353 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | |
5354 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
5355 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | |
5356 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | |
5357 | |
5358 \def\CHAPPAGon{% | |
5359 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
5360 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | |
5361 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | |
5362 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | |
5363 | |
5364 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% | |
5365 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
5366 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | |
5367 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | |
5368 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | |
5369 | |
5370 \CHAPPAGon | |
5371 | |
5372 % Chapter opening. | |
5373 % | |
5374 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, | |
5375 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | |
5376 % | |
5377 % To test against our argument. | |
5378 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | |
5379 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | |
5380 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | |
5381 % | |
5382 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5383 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5384 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5385 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5386 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5387 \gdef\thissection{}}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5388 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5389 \def\temptype{#2}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5390 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5391 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5392 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5393 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5394 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5395 \gdef\thischapter{}}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5396 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5397 \toks0={#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5398 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5399 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5400 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5401 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5402 % commands in some of the translations. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5403 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5404 \noexpand\thischapternum: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5405 \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5406 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5407 \else |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5408 \toks0={#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5409 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5410 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5411 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5412 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5413 % commands in some of the translations. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5414 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5415 \noexpand\thischapternum: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5416 \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5417 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5418 \fi\fi\fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5419 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5420 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5421 % the preceding space. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5422 \safewhatsit\domark |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5423 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5424 % Insert the chapter heading break. |
84318 | 5425 \pchapsepmacro |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5426 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5427 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5428 % between here and the heading. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5429 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5430 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5431 \domark |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5432 % |
84318 | 5433 {% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5434 \chapfonts \rmisbold |
84318 | 5435 % |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5436 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the |
84318 | 5437 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called |
5438 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5439 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
84318 | 5440 % |
5441 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | |
5442 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | |
5443 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
5444 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
5445 \def\toctype{unnchap}% | |
5446 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
5447 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | |
5448 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
5449 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
5450 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | |
5451 \def\toctype{app}% | |
5452 \else | |
5453 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | |
5454 \def\toctype{numchap}% | |
5455 \fi\fi\fi | |
5456 % | |
5457 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the | |
5458 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | |
5459 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | |
5460 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | |
5461 % | |
5462 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | |
5463 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | |
5464 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | |
5465 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | |
5466 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | |
5467 \donoderef{#2}% | |
5468 % | |
5469 % Typeset the actual heading. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5470 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5471 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright |
84318 | 5472 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
5473 \unhbox0 #1\par}% | |
5474 }% | |
5475 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | |
5476 \nobreak | |
5477 } | |
5478 | |
5479 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | |
5480 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
5481 \def\centerparameters{% | |
5482 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | |
5483 \leftskip = \rightskip | |
5484 \parfillskip = 0pt | |
5485 } | |
5486 | |
5487 | |
5488 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not | |
5489 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. | |
5490 % | |
5491 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | |
5492 % | |
5493 \def\unnchfopen #1{% | |
5494 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5495 \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5496 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
84318 | 5497 } |
5498 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | |
5499 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | |
5500 \par\penalty 5000 % | |
5501 } | |
5502 \def\centerchfopen #1{% | |
5503 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
5504 \parindent=0pt | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5505 \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
84318 | 5506 } |
5507 \def\CHAPFopen{% | |
5508 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | |
5509 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | |
5510 | |
5511 | |
5512 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and | |
5513 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | |
5514 % | |
5515 \newskip\secheadingskip | |
5516 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} | |
5517 | |
5518 % Subsection titles. | |
5519 \newskip\subsecheadingskip | |
5520 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | |
5521 | |
5522 % Subsubsection titles. | |
5523 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} | |
5524 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | |
5525 | |
5526 | |
5527 % Print any size, any type, section title. | |
5528 % | |
5529 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is | |
5530 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | |
5531 % section number. | |
5532 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5533 \def\seckeyword{sec} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5534 % |
84318 | 5535 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% |
5536 {% | |
5537 % Switch to the right set of fonts. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5538 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5539 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5540 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5541 \def\temptype{#3}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5542 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5543 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5544 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5545 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5546 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5547 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5548 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5549 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5550 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5551 % Don't redefine \thissection. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5552 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5553 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5554 \toks0={#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5555 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5556 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5557 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5558 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5559 % commands in some of the translations. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5560 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5561 \noexpand\thissectionnum: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5562 \noexpand\thissectionname}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5563 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5564 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5565 \else |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5566 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5567 \toks0={#1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5568 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5569 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5570 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5571 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5572 % commands in some of the translations. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5573 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5574 \noexpand\thissectionnum: |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5575 \noexpand\thissectionname}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5576 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5577 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5578 \fi\fi\fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5579 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5580 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5581 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5582 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5583 \par |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5584 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5585 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5586 % the preceding space. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5587 \safewhatsit\domark |
84318 | 5588 % |
5589 % Insert space above the heading. | |
5590 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | |
5591 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5592 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5593 % between here and the heading. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5594 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5595 \domark |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5596 % |
84318 | 5597 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. |
5598 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
5599 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
5600 \def\toctype{unn}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5601 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
84318 | 5602 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
5603 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5604 % and don't redefine \lastsection. |
84318 | 5605 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
5606 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
5607 \let\sectionlevel=\empty | |
5608 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
5609 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
5610 \def\toctype{app}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5611 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
84318 | 5612 \else |
5613 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
5614 \def\toctype{num}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5615 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
84318 | 5616 \fi\fi\fi |
5617 % | |
5618 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. | |
5619 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | |
5620 % | |
5621 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). | |
5622 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. | |
5623 \donoderef{#3}% | |
5624 % | |
5625 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. | |
5626 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be | |
5627 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the | |
5628 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that | |
5629 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the | |
5630 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. | |
5631 \nobreak | |
5632 % | |
5633 % Output the actual section heading. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5634 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright |
84318 | 5635 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
5636 \unhbox0 #1}% | |
5637 }% | |
5638 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. | |
5639 % Don't allow stretch, though. | |
5640 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | |
5641 % | |
5642 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | |
5643 % was followed by glue. | |
5644 \nobreak | |
5645 % | |
5646 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | |
5647 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | |
5648 % discardable item.) | |
5649 \vskip-\parskip | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5650 % |
84318 | 5651 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > |
5652 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after | |
5653 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5654 % |
84318 | 5655 % @section sec-whatever |
5656 % @deffn def-whatever | |
5657 \penalty 10001 | |
5658 } | |
5659 | |
5660 | |
5661 \message{toc,} | |
5662 % Table of contents. | |
5663 \newwrite\tocfile | |
5664 | |
5665 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | |
5666 % Called from @chapter, etc. | |
5667 % | |
5668 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} | |
5669 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | |
5670 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | |
5671 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | |
5672 % destination to jump to. | |
5673 % | |
5674 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or | |
5675 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | |
5676 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the | |
5677 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | |
5678 % | |
5679 \newif\iftocfileopened | |
5680 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% | |
5681 % | |
5682 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | |
5683 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | |
5684 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | |
5685 \iftocfileopened\else | |
5686 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | |
5687 \global\tocfileopenedtrue | |
5688 \fi | |
5689 % | |
5690 \iflinks | |
5691 {\atdummies | |
5692 \edef\temp{% | |
5693 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | |
5694 \temp | |
5695 }% | |
5696 \fi | |
5697 \fi | |
5698 % | |
5699 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | |
5700 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't | |
5701 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | |
5702 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | |
5703 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named | |
5704 % `1', and two named `2'. | |
5705 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | |
5706 } | |
5707 | |
5708 | |
5709 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman | |
5710 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant | |
5711 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5712 % |
84318 | 5713 \def\activecatcodes{% |
5714 \catcode`\"=\active | |
5715 \catcode`\$=\active | |
5716 \catcode`\<=\active | |
5717 \catcode`\>=\active | |
5718 \catcode`\\=\active | |
5719 \catcode`\^=\active | |
5720 \catcode`\_=\active | |
5721 \catcode`\|=\active | |
5722 \catcode`\~=\active | |
5723 } | |
5724 | |
5725 | |
5726 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. | |
5727 \def\readtocfile{% | |
5728 \setupdatafile | |
5729 \activecatcodes | |
5730 \input \tocreadfilename | |
5731 } | |
5732 | |
5733 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | |
5734 \newcount\savepageno | |
5735 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | |
5736 | |
5737 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. | |
5738 % | |
5739 \def\startcontents#1{% | |
5740 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should | |
5741 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain | |
5742 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | |
5743 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | |
5744 \contentsalignmacro | |
5745 \immediate\closeout\tocfile | |
5746 % | |
5747 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | |
5748 % It is abundantly clear what they are. | |
5749 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | |
5750 % | |
5751 \savepageno = \pageno | |
5752 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. | |
5753 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | |
5754 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | |
5755 % | |
5756 % Roman numerals for page numbers. | |
5757 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | |
5758 } | |
5759 | |
5760 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on | |
5761 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5762 % |
84318 | 5763 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} |
5764 | |
5765 % Normal (long) toc. | |
5766 % | |
5767 \def\contents{% | |
5768 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% | |
5769 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space | |
5770 \ifeof 1 \else | |
5771 \readtocfile | |
5772 \fi | |
5773 \vfill \eject | |
5774 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
5775 \ifeof 1 \else | |
5776 \pdfmakeoutlines | |
5777 \fi | |
5778 \closein 1 | |
5779 \endgroup | |
5780 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
5781 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
5782 } | |
5783 | |
5784 % And just the chapters. | |
5785 \def\summarycontents{% | |
5786 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% | |
5787 % | |
5788 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | |
5789 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | |
5790 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | |
5791 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | |
5792 \secfonts | |
5793 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | |
5794 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | |
5795 \rm | |
5796 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | |
5797 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | |
5798 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | |
5799 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5800 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5801 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5802 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5803 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5804 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5805 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5806 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5807 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space | |
5808 \ifeof 1 \else | |
5809 \readtocfile | |
5810 \fi | |
5811 \closein 1 | |
5812 \vfill \eject | |
5813 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
5814 \endgroup | |
5815 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
5816 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
5817 } | |
5818 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | |
5819 | |
5820 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. | |
5821 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | |
5822 % | |
5823 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | |
5824 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | |
5825 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | |
5826 % But use \hss just in case. | |
5827 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | |
5828 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | |
5829 % | |
5830 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange | |
5831 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and | |
5832 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | |
5833 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | |
5834 % there are before deciding ... | |
5835 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | |
5836 } | |
5837 | |
5838 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | |
5839 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | |
5840 % The last argument is the page number. | |
5841 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | |
5842 | |
5843 % Chapters, in the main contents. | |
5844 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
5845 % | |
5846 % Chapters, in the short toc. | |
5847 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | |
5848 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% | |
5849 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | |
5850 } | |
5851 | |
5852 % Appendices, in the main contents. | |
5853 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. | |
5854 % | |
5855 \def\appendixbox#1{% | |
5856 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | |
5857 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | |
5858 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | |
5859 % | |
5860 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
5861 | |
5862 % Unnumbered chapters. | |
5863 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} | |
5864 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | |
5865 | |
5866 % Sections. | |
5867 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
5868 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | |
5869 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
5870 | |
5871 % Subsections. | |
5872 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
5873 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | |
5874 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
5875 | |
5876 % And subsubsections. | |
5877 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
5878 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | |
5879 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
5880 | |
5881 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | |
5882 % Same as \defaultparindent. | |
5883 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | |
5884 | |
5885 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | |
5886 % page number. | |
5887 % | |
5888 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | |
5889 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | |
5890 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | |
5891 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | |
5892 \begingroup | |
5893 \chapentryfonts | |
5894 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5895 \endgroup | |
5896 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | |
5897 } | |
5898 | |
5899 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5900 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | |
5901 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5902 \endgroup} | |
5903 | |
5904 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5905 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | |
5906 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5907 \endgroup} | |
5908 | |
5909 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5910 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | |
5911 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5912 \endgroup} | |
5913 | |
5914 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. | |
5915 \let\tocentry = \entry | |
5916 | |
5917 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | |
5918 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | |
5919 | |
5920 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
5921 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
5922 | |
5923 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | |
5924 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
5925 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
5926 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
5927 | |
5928 | |
5929 \message{environments,} | |
5930 % @foo ... @end foo. | |
5931 | |
5932 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | |
5933 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | |
5934 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | |
5935 | |
5936 \envdef\tex{% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5937 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% |
84318 | 5938 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
5939 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | |
5940 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie | |
5941 \catcode `\%=14 | |
5942 \catcode `\+=\other | |
5943 \catcode `\"=\other | |
5944 \catcode `\|=\other | |
5945 \catcode `\<=\other | |
5946 \catcode `\>=\other | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5947 \catcode`\`=\other |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5948 \catcode`\'=\other |
84318 | 5949 \escapechar=`\\ |
5950 % | |
5951 \let\b=\ptexb | |
5952 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | |
5953 \let\c=\ptexc | |
5954 \let\,=\ptexcomma | |
5955 \let\.=\ptexdot | |
5956 \let\dots=\ptexdots | |
5957 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | |
5958 \let\!=\ptexexclam | |
5959 \let\i=\ptexi | |
5960 \let\indent=\ptexindent | |
5961 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
5962 \let\{=\ptexlbrace | |
5963 \let\+=\tabalign | |
5964 \let\}=\ptexrbrace | |
5965 \let\/=\ptexslash | |
5966 \let\*=\ptexstar | |
5967 \let\t=\ptext | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
5968 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer |
84318 | 5969 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing |
5970 % | |
5971 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | |
5972 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | |
5973 \def\@{@}% | |
5974 } | |
5975 % There is no need to define \Etex. | |
5976 | |
5977 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. | |
5978 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, | |
5979 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). | |
5980 | |
5981 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | |
5982 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | |
5983 | |
5984 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | |
5985 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | |
5986 % have any width. | |
5987 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | |
5988 | |
5989 % This space is always present above and below environments. | |
5990 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | |
5991 | |
5992 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here | |
5993 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | |
5994 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | |
5995 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. | |
5996 % | |
5997 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% | |
5998 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and | |
5999 % \sectionheading, q.v. | |
6000 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else | |
6001 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip | |
6002 \endgraf | |
6003 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | |
6004 \removelastskip | |
6005 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak | |
6006 % or better ... | |
6007 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | |
6008 \vskip\envskipamount | |
6009 \fi | |
6010 \fi | |
6011 }} | |
6012 | |
6013 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | |
6014 | |
6015 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will | |
6016 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. | |
6017 \let\nonarrowing=\relax | |
6018 | |
6019 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | |
6020 % environment contents. | |
6021 \font\circle=lcircle10 | |
6022 \newdimen\circthick | |
6023 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | |
6024 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | |
6025 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | |
6026 % | |
6027 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | |
6028 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | |
6029 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | |
6030 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | |
6031 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
6032 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | |
6033 \hskip\rskip}} | |
6034 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
6035 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | |
6036 \hskip\rskip}} | |
6037 % | |
6038 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | |
6039 | |
6040 \envdef\cartouche{% | |
6041 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | |
6042 \startsavinginserts | |
6043 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | |
6044 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | |
6045 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | |
6046 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | |
6047 \cartouter=\hsize | |
6048 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | |
6049 % side, and for 6pt waste from | |
6050 % each corner char, and rule thickness | |
6051 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | |
6052 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | |
6053 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
6054 \vbox\bgroup | |
6055 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | |
6056 \carttop | |
6057 \hbox\bgroup | |
6058 \hskip\lskip | |
6059 \vrule\kern3pt | |
6060 \vbox\bgroup | |
6061 \kern3pt | |
6062 \hsize=\cartinner | |
6063 \baselineskip=\normbskip | |
6064 \lineskip=\normlskip | |
6065 \parskip=\normpskip | |
6066 \vskip -\parskip | |
6067 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. | |
6068 } | |
6069 \def\Ecartouche{% | |
6070 \ifhmode\par\fi | |
6071 \kern3pt | |
6072 \egroup | |
6073 \kern3pt\vrule | |
6074 \hskip\rskip | |
6075 \egroup | |
6076 \cartbot | |
6077 \egroup | |
6078 \checkinserts | |
6079 } | |
6080 | |
6081 | |
6082 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | |
6083 % inside a group. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6084 \newdimen\nonfillparindent |
84318 | 6085 \def\nonfillstart{% |
6086 \aboveenvbreak | |
6087 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | |
6088 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | |
6089 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | |
6090 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | |
6091 \parskip = 0pt | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6092 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6093 % the normal \indent. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6094 \nonfillparindent=\parindent |
84318 | 6095 \parindent = 0pt |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6096 \let\indent\nonfillindent |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6097 % |
84318 | 6098 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes |
6099 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
6100 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
6101 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | |
6102 \else | |
6103 \let\nonarrowing = \relax | |
6104 \fi | |
6105 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | |
6106 } | |
6107 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6108 \begingroup |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6109 \obeyspaces |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6110 % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6111 % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6112 % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6113 % @indent. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6114 \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6115 \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6116 \ifx\temp % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6117 \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6118 \else% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6119 \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6120 \fi% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6121 }% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6122 \endgroup |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6123 \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6124 \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6125 |
84318 | 6126 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. |
6127 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | |
6128 % This affects the following displayed environments: | |
6129 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp | |
6130 % | |
6131 \def\smallword{small} | |
6132 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | |
6133 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | |
6134 \def\setnormaldispenv{% | |
6135 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | |
6136 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank | |
6137 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but | |
6138 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient | |
6139 % to change the fonts afterward. | |
6140 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi | |
6141 \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
6142 \fi | |
6143 } | |
6144 \def\setsmalldispenv{% | |
6145 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | |
6146 \else | |
6147 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi | |
6148 \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
6149 \fi | |
6150 } | |
6151 | |
6152 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. | |
6153 % Let's do it by one command: | |
6154 \def\makedispenv #1#2{ | |
6155 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} | |
6156 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} | |
6157 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
6158 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
6159 } | |
6160 | |
6161 % Define two synonyms: | |
6162 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ | |
6163 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} | |
6164 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} | |
6165 } | |
6166 | |
6167 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. | |
6168 % | |
6169 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. | |
6170 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | |
6171 % | |
6172 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% | |
6173 \nonfillstart | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6174 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% |
84318 | 6175 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. |
6176 \gobble % eat return | |
6177 } | |
6178 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. | |
6179 % | |
6180 \makedispenv {display}{% | |
6181 \nonfillstart | |
6182 \gobble | |
6183 } | |
6184 | |
6185 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | |
6186 % | |
6187 \makedispenv{format}{% | |
6188 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
6189 \nonfillstart | |
6190 \gobble | |
6191 } | |
6192 | |
6193 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. | |
6194 \envdef\flushleft{% | |
6195 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
6196 \nonfillstart | |
6197 \gobble | |
6198 } | |
6199 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak | |
6200 | |
6201 % @flushright. | |
6202 % | |
6203 \envdef\flushright{% | |
6204 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
6205 \nonfillstart | |
6206 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill | |
6207 \gobble | |
6208 } | |
6209 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak | |
6210 | |
6211 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6212 % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6213 % justification. From plain.tex. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6214 \envdef\raggedright{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6215 \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6216 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6217 \let\Eraggedright\par |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6218 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6219 \envdef\raggedleft{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6220 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6221 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6222 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6223 % badness reporting. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6224 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6225 \let\Eraggedleft\par |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6226 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6227 \envdef\raggedcenter{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6228 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6229 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6230 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6231 % badness reporting. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6232 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6233 \let\Eraggedcenter\par |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6234 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6235 |
84318 | 6236 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
6237 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since | |
6238 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | |
6239 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | |
6240 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6241 \def\quotationstart{% |
84318 | 6242 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
6243 \parindent=0pt | |
6244 % | |
6245 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | |
6246 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
6247 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
6248 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | |
6249 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | |
6250 \else | |
6251 \let\nonarrowing = \relax | |
6252 \fi | |
6253 \parsearg\quotationlabel | |
6254 } | |
6255 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6256 \envdef\quotation{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6257 \setnormaldispenv |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6258 \quotationstart |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6259 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6260 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6261 \envdef\smallquotation{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6262 \setsmalldispenv |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6263 \quotationstart |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6264 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6265 \let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6266 |
84318 | 6267 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're |
6268 % doing normal filling. | |
6269 % | |
6270 \def\Equotation{% | |
6271 \par | |
6272 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else | |
6273 % indent a bit. | |
6274 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | |
6275 \fi | |
6276 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | |
6277 } | |
6278 | |
6279 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. | |
6280 \def\quotationlabel#1{% | |
6281 \def\temp{#1}% | |
6282 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
6283 {\bf #1: }% | |
6284 \fi | |
6285 } | |
6286 | |
6287 | |
6288 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | |
6289 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, | |
6290 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: | |
6291 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org | |
6292 % | |
6293 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. | |
6294 % | |
6295 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets | |
6296 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | |
6297 % verbatim line. | |
6298 \def\dospecials{% | |
6299 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% | |
6300 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | |
6301 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6302 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6303 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6304 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6305 %\do\`\do\'% |
84318 | 6306 } |
6307 % | |
6308 % [Knuth] p. 380 | |
6309 \def\uncatcodespecials{% | |
6310 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} | |
6311 % | |
6312 % Setup for the @verb command. | |
6313 % | |
6314 % Eight spaces for a tab | |
6315 \begingroup | |
6316 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
6317 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | |
6318 \endgroup | |
6319 % | |
6320 \def\setupverb{% | |
6321 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
6322 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6323 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% |
84318 | 6324 \tabeightspaces |
6325 % Respect line breaks, | |
6326 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
6327 % make each space count | |
6328 % must do in this order: | |
6329 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
6330 } | |
6331 | |
6332 % Setup for the @verbatim environment | |
6333 % | |
6334 % Real tab expansion | |
6335 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | |
6336 % | |
6337 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | |
6338 % | |
6339 \begingroup | |
6340 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
6341 \gdef\tabexpand{% | |
6342 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
6343 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | |
6344 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | |
6345 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | |
6346 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | |
6347 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw | |
6348 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | |
6349 }% | |
6350 } | |
6351 \endgroup | |
6352 | |
6353 % start the verbatim environment. | |
6354 \def\setupverbatim{% | |
6355 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
6356 \nonfillstart | |
6357 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
6358 \tt | |
6359 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | |
6360 \tabexpand | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6361 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% |
84318 | 6362 % Respect line breaks, |
6363 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
6364 % make each space count | |
6365 % must do in this order: | |
6366 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
6367 \everypar{\starttabbox}% | |
6368 } | |
6369 | |
6370 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique | |
6371 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a | |
6372 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: | |
6373 % | |
6374 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | |
6375 % | |
6376 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | |
6377 \begingroup | |
6378 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other | |
6379 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] | |
6380 \endgroup | |
6381 % | |
6382 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | |
6383 % | |
6384 % | |
6385 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | |
6386 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | |
6387 % | |
6388 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | |
6389 % | |
6390 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, | |
6391 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': | |
6392 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. | |
6393 % | |
6394 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | |
6395 % | |
6396 \begingroup | |
6397 \catcode`\ =\active | |
6398 \obeylines % | |
6399 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | |
6400 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank | |
6401 % line in the output. | |
6402 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | |
6403 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | |
6404 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | |
6405 \endgroup | |
6406 % | |
6407 \envdef\verbatim{% | |
6408 \setupverbatim\doverbatim | |
6409 } | |
6410 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak | |
6411 | |
6412 | |
6413 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | |
6414 % | |
6415 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} | |
6416 % | |
6417 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | |
6418 {% | |
6419 \makevalueexpandable | |
6420 \setupverbatim | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6421 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. |
84318 | 6422 \input #1 |
6423 \afterenvbreak | |
6424 }% | |
6425 } | |
6426 | |
6427 % @copying ... @end copying. | |
6428 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. | |
6429 % | |
6430 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. | |
6431 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | |
6432 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | |
6433 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | |
6434 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | |
6435 % possible is very desirable. | |
6436 % | |
6437 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} | |
6438 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} | |
6439 % | |
6440 \def\insertcopying{% | |
6441 \begingroup | |
6442 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page | |
6443 \scanexp\copyingtext | |
6444 \endgroup | |
6445 } | |
6446 | |
6447 | |
6448 \message{defuns,} | |
6449 % @defun etc. | |
6450 | |
6451 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | |
6452 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | |
6453 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | |
6454 \newcount\defunpenalty | |
6455 | |
6456 % Start the processing of @deffn: | |
6457 \def\startdefun{% | |
6458 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | |
6459 \medbreak | |
6460 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the | |
6461 % following @def command, see below. | |
6462 \else | |
6463 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | |
6464 % which is there to keep the function description together with its | |
6465 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | |
6466 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted | |
6467 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning | |
6468 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow | |
6469 % a break between a section heading and a defun. | |
6470 % | |
6471 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling | |
6472 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the | |
6473 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following | |
6474 % @def command. | |
6475 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi | |
6476 % | |
6477 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | |
6478 % But do insert the glue. | |
6479 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | |
6480 \fi | |
6481 % | |
6482 \parindent=0in | |
6483 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | |
6484 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
6485 } | |
6486 | |
6487 \def\dodefunx#1{% | |
6488 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | |
6489 \checkenv#1% | |
6490 % | |
6491 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | |
6492 % It's not a great place, though. | |
6493 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi | |
6494 % | |
6495 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | |
6496 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | |
6497 } | |
6498 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} | |
6499 | |
6500 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} | |
6501 % | |
6502 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | |
6503 \begingroup | |
6504 % call \deffnheader: | |
6505 #1#2 \endheader | |
6506 % common ending: | |
6507 \interlinepenalty = 10000 | |
6508 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | |
6509 \endgraf | |
6510 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | |
6511 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx | |
6512 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, | |
6513 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. | |
6514 \checkparencounts | |
6515 \endgroup | |
6516 } | |
6517 | |
6518 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} | |
6519 | |
6520 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6521 % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. |
84318 | 6522 % |
6523 \def\makedefun#1{% | |
6524 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | |
6525 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | |
6526 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | |
6527 \temp | |
6528 } | |
6529 | |
6530 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader | |
6531 % | |
6532 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. | |
6533 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | |
6534 % | |
6535 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% | |
6536 \envdef#1{% | |
6537 \startdefun | |
6538 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | |
6539 }% | |
6540 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | |
6541 \def#3% | |
6542 } | |
6543 | |
6544 %%% Untyped functions: | |
6545 | |
6546 % @deffn category name args | |
6547 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | |
6548 | |
6549 % @deffn category class name args | |
6550 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
6551 | |
6552 % \defopon {category on}class name args | |
6553 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
6554 | |
6555 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args | |
6556 % | |
6557 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | |
6558 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | |
6559 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | |
6560 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | |
6561 } | |
6562 | |
6563 %%% Typed functions: | |
6564 | |
6565 % @deftypefn category type name args | |
6566 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | |
6567 | |
6568 % @deftypeop category class type name args | |
6569 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
6570 | |
6571 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args | |
6572 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
6573 | |
6574 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args | |
6575 % | |
6576 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
6577 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
6578 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
6579 } | |
6580 | |
6581 %%% Typed variables: | |
6582 | |
6583 % @deftypevr category type var args | |
6584 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | |
6585 | |
6586 % @deftypecv category class type var args | |
6587 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
6588 | |
6589 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args | |
6590 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
6591 | |
6592 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args | |
6593 % | |
6594 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
6595 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
6596 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
6597 } | |
6598 | |
6599 %%% Untyped variables: | |
6600 | |
6601 % @defvr category var args | |
6602 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | |
6603 | |
6604 % @defcv category class var args | |
6605 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
6606 | |
6607 % \defcvof {category of}class var args | |
6608 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | |
6609 | |
6610 %%% Type: | |
6611 % @deftp category name args | |
6612 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | |
6613 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | |
6614 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | |
6615 } | |
6616 | |
6617 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: | |
6618 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
6619 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | |
6620 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | |
6621 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
6622 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
6623 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | |
6624 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
6625 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | |
6626 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | |
6627 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
6628 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
6629 | |
6630 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). | |
6631 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | |
6632 % #2 is the return type, if any. | |
6633 % #3 is the function name. | |
6634 % | |
6635 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. | |
6636 % | |
6637 \def\defname#1#2#3{% | |
6638 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | |
6639 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | |
6640 % | |
6641 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps | |
6642 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | |
6643 % just below it. | |
6644 \def\temp{#1}% | |
6645 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | |
6646 % | |
6647 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. | |
6648 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | |
6649 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | |
6650 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | |
6651 % The continuations: | |
6652 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | |
6653 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) | |
6654 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 | |
6655 % | |
6656 % Put the type name to the right margin. | |
6657 \noindent | |
6658 \hbox to 0pt{% | |
6659 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | |
6660 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | |
6661 \kern\leftskip | |
6662 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | |
6663 }% | |
6664 % | |
6665 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | |
6666 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | |
6667 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
6668 {% | |
6669 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | |
6670 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | |
6671 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | |
6672 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in | |
6673 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | |
6674 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | |
6675 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | |
6676 % one has made identifiers using them :). | |
6677 \df \tt | |
6678 \def\temp{#2}% return value type | |
6679 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi | |
6680 #3% output function name | |
6681 }% | |
6682 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | |
6683 % | |
6684 \boldbrax | |
6685 % arguments will be output next, if any. | |
6686 } | |
6687 | |
6688 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using | |
6689 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | |
6690 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | |
6691 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | |
6692 % | |
6693 \def\defunargs#1{% | |
6694 % use sl by default (not ttsl), | |
6695 % tt for the names. | |
6696 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | |
6697 % | |
6698 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | |
6699 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6700 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% |
84318 | 6701 #1% |
6702 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | |
6703 } | |
6704 | |
6705 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. | |
6706 % | |
6707 \def\activeparens{% | |
6708 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | |
6709 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | |
6710 \catcode`\&=\active | |
6711 } | |
6712 | |
6713 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | |
6714 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | |
6715 | |
6716 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, | |
6717 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | |
6718 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | |
6719 { | |
6720 \activeparens | |
6721 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | |
6722 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | |
6723 \global\let& = \& | |
6724 | |
6725 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | |
6726 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | |
6727 } | |
6728 | |
6729 \newcount\parencount | |
6730 | |
6731 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | |
6732 \newif\ifampseen | |
6733 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | |
6734 | |
6735 \def\parenfont{% | |
6736 \ifampseen | |
6737 % At the first level, print parens in roman, | |
6738 % otherwise use the default font. | |
6739 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | |
6740 \else | |
6741 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | |
6742 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . | |
6743 \sf | |
6744 \fi | |
6745 } | |
6746 \def\infirstlevel#1{% | |
6747 \ifampseen | |
6748 \ifnum\parencount=1 | |
6749 #1% | |
6750 \fi | |
6751 \fi | |
6752 } | |
6753 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | |
6754 | |
6755 \def\opnr{% | |
6756 \global\advance\parencount by 1 | |
6757 {\parenfont(}% | |
6758 \infirstlevel \bfafterword | |
6759 } | |
6760 \def\clnr{% | |
6761 {\parenfont)}% | |
6762 \infirstlevel \sl | |
6763 \global\advance\parencount by -1 | |
6764 } | |
6765 | |
6766 \newcount\brackcount | |
6767 \def\lbrb{% | |
6768 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | |
6769 {\bf[}% | |
6770 } | |
6771 \def\rbrb{% | |
6772 {\bf]}% | |
6773 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | |
6774 } | |
6775 | |
6776 \def\checkparencounts{% | |
6777 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | |
6778 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | |
6779 } | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6780 % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6781 % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). |
84318 | 6782 \def\badparencount{% |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6783 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% |
84318 | 6784 \global\parencount=0 |
6785 } | |
6786 \def\badbrackcount{% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6787 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% |
84318 | 6788 \global\brackcount=0 |
6789 } | |
6790 | |
6791 | |
6792 \message{macros,} | |
6793 % @macro. | |
6794 | |
6795 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | |
6796 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | |
6797 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | |
6798 \newwrite\macscribble | |
6799 \def\scantokens#1{% | |
6800 \toks0={#1}% | |
6801 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | |
6802 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | |
6803 \immediate\closeout\macscribble | |
6804 \input \jobname.tmp | |
6805 } | |
6806 \fi | |
6807 | |
6808 \def\scanmacro#1{% | |
6809 \begingroup | |
6810 \newlinechar`\^^M | |
6811 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | |
6812 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | |
6813 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active | |
6814 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had | |
6815 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears | |
6816 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 | |
6817 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ | |
6818 % ... and \example | |
6819 \spaceisspace | |
6820 % | |
6821 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | |
6822 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX | |
6823 % --kasal, 29nov03 | |
6824 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% | |
6825 \endgroup | |
6826 } | |
6827 | |
6828 \def\scanexp#1{% | |
6829 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% | |
6830 \temp | |
6831 } | |
6832 | |
6833 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters | |
6834 \newtoks\macname % Macro name | |
6835 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? | |
6836 | |
6837 % List of all defined macros in the form | |
6838 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... | |
6839 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split | |
6840 % if there is a need. | |
6841 \def\macrolist{} | |
6842 | |
6843 % Add the macro to \macrolist | |
6844 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} | |
6845 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% | |
6846 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% | |
6847 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% | |
6848 } | |
6849 | |
6850 % Utility routines. | |
6851 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, | |
6852 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname | |
6853 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6854 % |
84318 | 6855 \def\cslet#1#2{% |
6856 \expandafter\let | |
6857 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname | |
6858 \csname#2\endcsname | |
6859 } | |
6860 | |
6861 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | |
6862 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | |
6863 {\catcode`\@=11 | |
6864 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | |
6865 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | |
6866 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | |
6867 \def\unbrace#1{#1} | |
6868 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | |
6869 } | |
6870 | |
6871 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | |
6872 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% | |
6873 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% | |
6874 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | |
6875 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | |
6876 } | |
6877 | |
6878 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | |
6879 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | |
6880 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | |
6881 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6882 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6883 % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6884 % confine the change to the current group. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6885 |
84318 | 6886 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is |
6887 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | |
6888 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | |
6889 | |
6890 \def\scanctxt{% | |
6891 \catcode`\"=\other | |
6892 \catcode`\+=\other | |
6893 \catcode`\<=\other | |
6894 \catcode`\>=\other | |
6895 \catcode`\@=\other | |
6896 \catcode`\^=\other | |
6897 \catcode`\_=\other | |
6898 \catcode`\|=\other | |
6899 \catcode`\~=\other | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6900 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi |
84318 | 6901 } |
6902 | |
6903 \def\scanargctxt{% | |
6904 \scanctxt | |
6905 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6906 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
6907 } | |
6908 | |
6909 \def\macrobodyctxt{% | |
6910 \scanctxt | |
6911 \catcode`\{=\other | |
6912 \catcode`\}=\other | |
6913 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
6914 \usembodybackslash | |
6915 } | |
6916 | |
6917 \def\macroargctxt{% | |
6918 \scanctxt | |
6919 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6920 } | |
6921 | |
6922 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | |
6923 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | |
6924 % where N is the macro parameter number. | |
6925 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | |
6926 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | |
6927 | |
6928 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | |
6929 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | |
6930 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | |
6931 } | |
6932 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | |
6933 | |
6934 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
6935 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
6936 | |
6937 \def\macroxxx#1{% | |
6938 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | |
6939 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments | |
6940 \paramno=0% | |
6941 \else | |
6942 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | |
6943 \fi | |
6944 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | |
6945 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | |
6946 \else | |
6947 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | |
6948 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi | |
6949 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% | |
6950 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | |
6951 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% | |
6952 \fi | |
6953 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | |
6954 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | |
6955 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | |
6956 \fi} | |
6957 | |
6958 \parseargdef\unmacro{% | |
6959 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname | |
6960 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | |
6961 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | |
6962 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: | |
6963 \begingroup | |
6964 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax | |
6965 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo | |
6966 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | |
6967 \endgroup | |
6968 \else | |
6969 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | |
6970 \fi | |
6971 } | |
6972 | |
6973 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any | |
6974 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | |
6975 % | |
6976 \def\unmacrodo#1{% | |
6977 \ifx #1\relax | |
6978 % remove this | |
6979 \else | |
6980 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% | |
6981 \fi | |
6982 } | |
6983 | |
6984 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a | |
6985 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | |
6986 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | |
6987 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | |
6988 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | |
6989 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | |
6990 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | |
6991 | |
6992 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist | |
6993 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah | |
6994 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | |
6995 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | |
6996 | |
6997 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | |
6998 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something | |
6999 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | |
7000 % it to # just before using the token list produced. | |
7001 % | |
7002 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | |
7003 % the macro is used. | |
7004 | |
7005 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | |
7006 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | |
7007 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | |
7008 \if#1;\let\next=\relax | |
7009 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | |
7010 \advance\paramno by 1% | |
7011 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | |
7012 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | |
7013 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | |
7014 \fi\next} | |
7015 | |
7016 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | |
7017 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | |
7018 | |
7019 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | |
7020 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
7021 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | |
7022 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
7023 | |
7024 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | |
7025 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | |
7026 % Much magic with \expandafter here. | |
7027 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | |
7028 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | |
7029 \def\defmacro{% | |
7030 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | |
7031 \ifrecursive | |
7032 \ifcase\paramno | |
7033 % 0 | |
7034 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
7035 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
7036 \or % 1 | |
7037 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
7038 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
7039 \noexpand\braceorline | |
7040 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
7041 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
7042 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
7043 \else % many | |
7044 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
7045 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
7046 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
7047 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
7048 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
7049 \expandafter\expandafter | |
7050 \expandafter\xdef | |
7051 \expandafter\expandafter | |
7052 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
7053 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
7054 \fi | |
7055 \else | |
7056 \ifcase\paramno | |
7057 % 0 | |
7058 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
7059 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
7060 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
7061 \or % 1 | |
7062 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
7063 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
7064 \noexpand\braceorline | |
7065 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
7066 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
7067 \egroup | |
7068 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
7069 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
7070 \else % many | |
7071 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
7072 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
7073 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
7074 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
7075 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
7076 \expandafter\expandafter | |
7077 \expandafter\xdef | |
7078 \expandafter\expandafter | |
7079 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
7080 \paramlist{% | |
7081 \egroup | |
7082 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
7083 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
7084 \fi | |
7085 \fi} | |
7086 | |
7087 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | |
7088 | |
7089 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | |
7090 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | |
7091 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | |
7092 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | |
7093 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} | |
7094 \def\braceorlinexxx{% | |
7095 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | |
7096 \expandafter\parsearg | |
7097 \fi \macnamexxx} | |
7098 | |
7099 | |
7100 % @alias. | |
7101 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | |
7102 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | |
7103 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} | |
7104 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} | |
7105 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% | |
7106 {% | |
7107 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | |
7108 \addtomacrolist{#1}% | |
7109 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | |
7110 }% | |
7111 \next | |
7112 } | |
7113 | |
7114 | |
7115 \message{cross references,} | |
7116 | |
7117 \newwrite\auxfile | |
7118 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. | |
7119 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | |
7120 | |
7121 % @inforef is relatively simple. | |
7122 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | |
7123 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | |
7124 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | |
7125 | |
7126 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in | |
7127 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and | |
7128 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: | |
7129 % @node foo , bar , ... | |
7130 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. | |
7131 % | |
7132 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} | |
7133 % | |
7134 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: | |
7135 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs | |
7136 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} | |
7137 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | |
7138 | |
7139 \let\nwnode=\node | |
7140 \let\lastnode=\empty | |
7141 | |
7142 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the | |
7143 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | |
7144 % | |
7145 \def\donoderef#1{% | |
7146 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | |
7147 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | |
7148 \global\let\lastnode=\empty | |
7149 \fi | |
7150 } | |
7151 | |
7152 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | |
7153 % | |
7154 \newcount\savesfregister | |
7155 % | |
7156 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | |
7157 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | |
7158 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | |
7159 | |
7160 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | |
7161 % anchor), which consists of three parts: | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7162 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, |
84318 | 7163 % or the anchor name. |
7164 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | |
7165 % empty for anchors. | |
7166 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. | |
7167 % | |
7168 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of | |
7169 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | |
7170 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | |
7171 % | |
7172 \def\setref#1#2{% | |
7173 \pdfmkdest{#1}% | |
7174 \iflinks | |
7175 {% | |
7176 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them | |
7177 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | |
7178 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | |
7179 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | |
7180 }% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7181 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% |
84318 | 7182 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% |
7183 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | |
7184 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout | |
7185 }% | |
7186 \fi | |
7187 } | |
7188 | |
7189 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is | |
7190 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | |
7191 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | |
7192 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. | |
7193 % | |
7194 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
7195 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
7196 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
7197 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | |
7198 \unsepspaces | |
7199 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | |
7200 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
7201 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | |
7202 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | |
7203 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt | |
7204 % No printed node name was explicitly given. | |
7205 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | |
7206 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | |
7207 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | |
7208 \else | |
7209 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | |
7210 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. | |
7211 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
7212 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | |
7213 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | |
7214 \else | |
7215 \ifhavexrefs | |
7216 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | |
7217 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% | |
7218 \else | |
7219 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | |
7220 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | |
7221 \fi% | |
7222 \fi | |
7223 \fi | |
7224 \fi | |
7225 % | |
7226 % Make link in pdf output. | |
7227 \ifpdf | |
7228 {\indexnofonts | |
7229 \turnoffactive | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7230 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7231 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7232 \getfilename{#4}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7233 % |
84318 | 7234 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. |
7235 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% | |
7236 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% | |
7237 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7238 \leavevmode |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7239 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
84318 | 7240 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7241 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% |
84318 | 7242 \else |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7243 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% |
84318 | 7244 \fi |
7245 }% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7246 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% |
84318 | 7247 \fi |
7248 % | |
7249 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" | |
7250 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the | |
7251 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | |
7252 {% | |
7253 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | |
7254 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | |
7255 \indexnofonts | |
7256 \turnoffactive | |
7257 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | |
7258 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | |
7259 }% | |
7260 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | |
7261 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | |
7262 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | |
7263 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | |
7264 \refx{#1-snt}{}% | |
7265 \else | |
7266 \printedrefname | |
7267 \fi | |
7268 % | |
7269 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | |
7270 % "in MANUALNAME". | |
7271 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
7272 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
7273 \fi | |
7274 \else | |
7275 % node/anchor (non-float) references. | |
7276 % | |
7277 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | |
7278 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | |
7279 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals | |
7280 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | |
7281 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | |
7282 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | |
7283 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7284 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% |
84318 | 7285 \else |
7286 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | |
7287 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | |
7288 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | |
7289 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | |
7290 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | |
7291 {\turnoffactive | |
7292 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | |
7293 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | |
7294 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | |
7295 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | |
7296 }% | |
7297 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | |
7298 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | |
7299 % | |
7300 % But we always want a comma and a space: | |
7301 ,\space | |
7302 % | |
7303 % output the `page 3'. | |
7304 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | |
7305 \fi | |
7306 \fi | |
7307 \endlink | |
7308 \endgroup} | |
7309 | |
7310 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref | |
7311 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | |
7312 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly | |
7313 % one that Bob is working on :). | |
7314 % | |
7315 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | |
7316 | |
7317 % Things referred to by \setref. | |
7318 % | |
7319 \def\Ynothing{} | |
7320 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} | |
7321 \def\Ynumbered{% | |
7322 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
7323 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | |
7324 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
7325 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | |
7326 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
7327 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
7328 \else | |
7329 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
7330 \fi\fi\fi | |
7331 } | |
7332 \def\Yappendix{% | |
7333 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
7334 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | |
7335 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
7336 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | |
7337 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
7338 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
7339 \else | |
7340 \putwordSection@tie | |
7341 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
7342 \fi\fi\fi | |
7343 } | |
7344 | |
7345 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | |
7346 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | |
7347 % | |
7348 \def\refx#1#2{% | |
7349 {% | |
7350 \indexnofonts | |
7351 \otherbackslash | |
7352 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | |
7353 \csname XR#1\endcsname | |
7354 }% | |
7355 \ifx\thisrefX\relax | |
7356 % If not defined, say something at least. | |
7357 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | |
7358 \iflinks | |
7359 \ifhavexrefs | |
7360 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | |
7361 \else | |
7362 \ifwarnedxrefs\else | |
7363 \global\warnedxrefstrue | |
7364 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | |
7365 \fi | |
7366 \fi | |
7367 \fi | |
7368 \else | |
7369 % It's defined, so just use it. | |
7370 \thisrefX | |
7371 \fi | |
7372 #2% Output the suffix in any case. | |
7373 } | |
7374 | |
7375 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's | |
7376 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | |
7377 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | |
7378 % | |
7379 \def\xrdef#1#2{% | |
7380 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current | |
7381 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these | |
7382 % mess up the control sequence name. | |
7383 \indexnofonts | |
7384 \turnoffactive | |
7385 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% | |
7386 }% | |
7387 % | |
7388 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref | |
7389 % | |
7390 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | |
7391 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname | |
7392 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. | |
7393 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | |
7394 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | |
7395 % | |
7396 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? | |
7397 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | |
7398 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | |
7399 \else | |
7400 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | |
7401 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | |
7402 \fi | |
7403 % | |
7404 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | |
7405 % for later use in \listoffloats. | |
7406 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 | |
7407 {\safexrefname}}% | |
7408 \fi | |
7409 } | |
7410 | |
7411 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. | |
7412 % | |
7413 \def\tryauxfile{% | |
7414 \openin 1 \jobname.aux | |
7415 \ifeof 1 \else | |
7416 \readdatafile{aux}% | |
7417 \global\havexrefstrue | |
7418 \fi | |
7419 \closein 1 | |
7420 } | |
7421 | |
7422 \def\setupdatafile{% | |
7423 \catcode`\^^@=\other | |
7424 \catcode`\^^A=\other | |
7425 \catcode`\^^B=\other | |
7426 \catcode`\^^C=\other | |
7427 \catcode`\^^D=\other | |
7428 \catcode`\^^E=\other | |
7429 \catcode`\^^F=\other | |
7430 \catcode`\^^G=\other | |
7431 \catcode`\^^H=\other | |
7432 \catcode`\^^K=\other | |
7433 \catcode`\^^L=\other | |
7434 \catcode`\^^N=\other | |
7435 \catcode`\^^P=\other | |
7436 \catcode`\^^Q=\other | |
7437 \catcode`\^^R=\other | |
7438 \catcode`\^^S=\other | |
7439 \catcode`\^^T=\other | |
7440 \catcode`\^^U=\other | |
7441 \catcode`\^^V=\other | |
7442 \catcode`\^^W=\other | |
7443 \catcode`\^^X=\other | |
7444 \catcode`\^^Z=\other | |
7445 \catcode`\^^[=\other | |
7446 \catcode`\^^\=\other | |
7447 \catcode`\^^]=\other | |
7448 \catcode`\^^^=\other | |
7449 \catcode`\^^_=\other | |
7450 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. | |
7451 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't | |
7452 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, | |
7453 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | |
7454 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | |
7455 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | |
7456 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could | |
7457 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. | |
7458 % | |
7459 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | |
7460 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | |
7461 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | |
7462 % | |
7463 \catcode`\^=\other | |
7464 % | |
7465 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... | |
7466 \catcode`\~=\other | |
7467 \catcode`\[=\other | |
7468 \catcode`\]=\other | |
7469 \catcode`\"=\other | |
7470 \catcode`\_=\other | |
7471 \catcode`\|=\other | |
7472 \catcode`\<=\other | |
7473 \catcode`\>=\other | |
7474 \catcode`\$=\other | |
7475 \catcode`\#=\other | |
7476 \catcode`\&=\other | |
7477 \catcode`\%=\other | |
7478 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off | |
7479 % | |
7480 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | |
7481 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than | |
7482 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | |
7483 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | |
7484 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | |
7485 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for | |
7486 % now. --karl, 15jan04. | |
7487 \catcode`\\=\other | |
7488 % | |
7489 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | |
7490 {% | |
7491 \count1=128 | |
7492 \def\loop{% | |
7493 \catcode\count1=\other | |
7494 \advance\count1 by 1 | |
7495 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi | |
7496 }% | |
7497 }% | |
7498 % | |
7499 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | |
7500 \catcode`\{=1 | |
7501 \catcode`\}=2 | |
7502 \catcode`\@=0 | |
7503 } | |
7504 | |
7505 \def\readdatafile#1{% | |
7506 \begingroup | |
7507 \setupdatafile | |
7508 \input\jobname.#1 | |
7509 \endgroup} | |
7510 | |
7511 | |
7512 \message{insertions,} | |
7513 % including footnotes. | |
7514 | |
7515 \newcount \footnoteno | |
7516 | |
7517 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | |
7518 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | |
7519 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | |
7520 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | |
7521 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | |
7522 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | |
7523 | |
7524 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | |
7525 \let\footnotestyle=\comment | |
7526 | |
7527 {\catcode `\@=11 | |
7528 % | |
7529 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. | |
7530 \gdef\footnote{% | |
7531 \let\indent=\ptexindent | |
7532 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
7533 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne | |
7534 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | |
7535 % | |
7536 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | |
7537 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | |
7538 \let\@sf\empty | |
7539 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi | |
7540 % | |
7541 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | |
7542 \unskip | |
7543 \thisfootno\@sf | |
7544 \dofootnote | |
7545 }% | |
7546 | |
7547 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | |
7548 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | |
7549 % | |
7550 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses | |
7551 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | |
7552 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. | |
7553 % | |
7554 \gdef\dofootnote{% | |
7555 \insert\footins\bgroup | |
7556 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the | |
7557 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | |
7558 % So reset some parameters. | |
7559 \hsize=\pagewidth | |
7560 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty | |
7561 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | |
7562 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | |
7563 \floatingpenalty\@MM | |
7564 \leftskip\z@skip | |
7565 \rightskip\z@skip | |
7566 \spaceskip\z@skip | |
7567 \xspaceskip\z@skip | |
7568 \parindent\defaultparindent | |
7569 % | |
7570 \smallfonts \rm | |
7571 % | |
7572 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears | |
7573 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use | |
7574 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | |
7575 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | |
7576 \let\noindent = \relax | |
7577 % | |
7578 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the | |
7579 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | |
7580 \everypar = {\hang}% | |
7581 \textindent{\thisfootno}% | |
7582 % | |
7583 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this | |
7584 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | |
7585 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | |
7586 \footstrut | |
7587 \futurelet\next\fo@t | |
7588 } | |
7589 }%end \catcode `\@=11 | |
7590 | |
7591 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create | |
7592 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion | |
7593 % would be lost. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7594 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote |
84318 | 7595 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. |
7596 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. | |
7597 | |
7598 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | |
7599 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | |
7600 % out prematurely. | |
7601 % | |
7602 \def\startsavinginserts{% | |
7603 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | |
7604 \let\insert\saveinsert | |
7605 \else | |
7606 \let\checkinserts\relax | |
7607 \fi | |
7608 } | |
7609 | |
7610 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and | |
7611 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | |
7612 % | |
7613 \def\saveinsert#1{% | |
7614 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
7615 \afterassignment\next | |
7616 % swallow the left brace | |
7617 \let\temp = | |
7618 } | |
7619 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} | |
7620 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | |
7621 | |
7622 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | |
7623 | |
7624 \def\placesaveins#1{% | |
7625 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | |
7626 {\box#1}% | |
7627 } | |
7628 | |
7629 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | |
7630 { | |
7631 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) | |
7632 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | |
7633 } | |
7634 | |
7635 % initialization: | |
7636 \def\newsaveins #1{% | |
7637 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
7638 \next | |
7639 } | |
7640 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | |
7641 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | |
7642 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | |
7643 \checksaveins #1}% | |
7644 } | |
7645 | |
7646 % initialize: | |
7647 \let\checkinserts\empty | |
7648 \newsaveins\footins | |
7649 \newsaveins\margin | |
7650 | |
7651 | |
7652 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | |
7653 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | |
7654 % | |
7655 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image | |
7656 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | |
7657 % undone and the next image would fail. | |
7658 \openin 1 = epsf.tex | |
7659 \ifeof 1 \else | |
7660 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in | |
7661 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | |
7662 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% | |
7663 \input epsf.tex | |
7664 \fi | |
7665 \closein 1 | |
7666 % | |
7667 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | |
7668 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | |
7669 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | |
7670 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | |
7671 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | |
7672 % | |
7673 \def\image#1{% | |
7674 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined | |
7675 \ifwarnednoepsf \else | |
7676 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | |
7677 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | |
7678 \global\warnednoepsftrue | |
7679 \fi | |
7680 \else | |
7681 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish | |
7682 \fi | |
7683 } | |
7684 % | |
7685 % Arguments to @image: | |
7686 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | |
7687 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | |
7688 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. | |
7689 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | |
7690 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | |
7691 \newif\ifimagevmode | |
7692 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | |
7693 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | |
7694 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names | |
7695 % If the image is by itself, center it. | |
7696 \ifvmode | |
7697 \imagevmodetrue | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7698 \nobreak\medskip |
84318 | 7699 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert |
7700 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | |
7701 % above and below. | |
7702 \nobreak\vskip\parskip | |
7703 \nobreak | |
7704 \fi | |
7705 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7706 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7707 % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7708 % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7709 \noindent |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7710 % |
84318 | 7711 % Output the image. |
7712 \ifpdf | |
7713 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% | |
7714 \else | |
7715 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | |
7716 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | |
7717 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | |
7718 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% | |
7719 \fi | |
7720 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7721 \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image |
84318 | 7722 \endgroup} |
7723 | |
7724 | |
7725 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, | |
7726 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the | |
7727 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. | |
7728 % | |
7729 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} | |
7730 | |
7731 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. | |
7732 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} | |
7733 | |
7734 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | |
7735 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, | |
7736 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | |
7737 % | |
7738 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to | |
7739 % be referable. | |
7740 % | |
7741 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It | |
7742 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | |
7743 % | |
7744 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each | |
7745 % chapter-level command. | |
7746 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | |
7747 % | |
7748 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | |
7749 \let\thiscaption=\empty | |
7750 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | |
7751 % | |
7752 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | |
7753 % | |
7754 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | |
7755 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
7756 % | |
7757 \startsavinginserts | |
7758 % | |
7759 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. | |
7760 \par | |
7761 % | |
7762 \vtop\bgroup | |
7763 \def\floattype{#1}% | |
7764 \def\floatlabel{#2}% | |
7765 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | |
7766 % | |
7767 \ifx\floattype\empty | |
7768 \let\safefloattype=\empty | |
7769 \else | |
7770 {% | |
7771 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
7772 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
7773 \indexnofonts | |
7774 \turnoffactive | |
7775 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
7776 }% | |
7777 \fi | |
7778 % | |
7779 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | |
7780 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
7781 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | |
7782 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) | |
7783 % | |
7784 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname | |
7785 \global\advance\floatno by 1 | |
7786 % | |
7787 {% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7788 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the |
84318 | 7789 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float |
7790 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | |
7791 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the | |
7792 % lists of floats. | |
7793 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7794 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% |
84318 | 7795 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% |
7796 }% | |
7797 \fi | |
7798 % | |
7799 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | |
7800 \vskip\parskip | |
7801 % | |
7802 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | |
7803 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
7804 } | |
7805 | |
7806 % we have these possibilities: | |
7807 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | |
7808 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 | |
7809 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap | |
7810 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo | |
7811 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap | |
7812 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 | |
7813 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap | |
7814 % @float & no caption: | |
7815 % | |
7816 \def\Efloat{% | |
7817 \let\floatident = \empty | |
7818 % | |
7819 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | |
7820 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | |
7821 % | |
7822 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | |
7823 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
7824 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | |
7825 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | |
7826 \fi | |
7827 % the number. | |
7828 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
7829 \fi | |
7830 % | |
7831 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | |
7832 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | |
7833 \let\captionline = \floatident | |
7834 % | |
7835 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | |
7836 \ifx\floatident\empty \else | |
7837 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | |
7838 \fi | |
7839 % | |
7840 % caption text. | |
7841 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% | |
7842 \fi | |
7843 % | |
7844 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | |
7845 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | |
7846 \ifx\captionline\empty \else | |
7847 \vskip.5\parskip | |
7848 \captionline | |
7849 % | |
7850 % Space below caption. | |
7851 \vskip\parskip | |
7852 \fi | |
7853 % | |
7854 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this | |
7855 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | |
7856 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
7857 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | |
7858 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short | |
7859 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | |
7860 {% | |
7861 \atdummies | |
7862 % | |
7863 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M | |
7864 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so | |
7865 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. | |
7866 \scanexp{% | |
7867 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% | |
7868 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | |
7869 \thiscaption | |
7870 \else | |
7871 \thisshortcaption | |
7872 \fi | |
7873 }% | |
7874 }% | |
7875 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident | |
7876 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% | |
7877 }% | |
7878 \fi | |
7879 \egroup % end of \vtop | |
7880 % | |
7881 % place the captured inserts | |
7882 % | |
7883 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning | |
7884 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly | |
7885 % float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
7886 % | |
7887 \checkinserts | |
7888 } | |
7889 | |
7890 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | |
7891 % | |
7892 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% | |
7893 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% | |
7894 } | |
7895 | |
7896 % @caption, @shortcaption | |
7897 % | |
7898 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} | |
7899 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} | |
7900 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} | |
7901 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} | |
7902 | |
7903 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | |
7904 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | |
7905 \def\getfloatno#1{% | |
7906 \ifx#1\relax | |
7907 % Haven't seen this figure type before. | |
7908 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | |
7909 % | |
7910 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | |
7911 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | |
7912 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | |
7913 \fi | |
7914 \let\floatno#1% | |
7915 } | |
7916 | |
7917 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref | |
7918 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we | |
7919 % first read the @float command. | |
7920 % | |
7921 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
7922 | |
7923 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | |
7924 % distinguish floats from other xref types. | |
7925 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | |
7926 | |
7927 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | |
7928 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7929 % \lastsection value which we \setref above. |
84318 | 7930 % |
7931 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} | |
7932 % | |
7933 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the | |
7934 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. | |
7935 % | |
7936 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% | |
7937 \def\temp{#1}% | |
7938 \def\iffloattype{#2}% | |
7939 \ifx\temp\floatmagic | |
7940 } | |
7941 | |
7942 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | |
7943 % | |
7944 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% | |
7945 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | |
7946 {% | |
7947 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
7948 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
7949 \indexnofonts | |
7950 \turnoffactive | |
7951 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
7952 }% | |
7953 % | |
7954 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | |
7955 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | |
7956 \ifhavexrefs | |
7957 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | |
7958 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | |
7959 \fi | |
7960 \else | |
7961 \begingroup | |
7962 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc | |
7963 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | |
7964 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | |
7965 \endgroup | |
7966 \fi | |
7967 } | |
7968 | |
7969 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the | |
7970 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | |
7971 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | |
7972 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | |
7973 % | |
7974 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since | |
7975 % they won't appear in the aux file). | |
7976 % | |
7977 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} | |
7978 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | |
7979 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just | |
7980 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | |
7981 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | |
7982 % in pdf output. | |
7983 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | |
7984 % | |
7985 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | |
7986 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | |
7987 \writeentry | |
7988 }} | |
7989 | |
7990 | |
7991 \message{localization,} | |
7992 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7993 % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7994 % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
7995 % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. |
84318 | 7996 % |
7997 { | |
7998 \catcode`\_ = \active | |
7999 \globaldefs=1 | |
8000 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup | |
8001 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames | |
8002 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. | |
8003 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. | |
8004 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | |
8005 \ifeof 1 | |
8006 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% | |
8007 \else | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8008 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist |
84318 | 8009 \input txi-#1.tex |
8010 \fi | |
8011 \closein 1 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8012 \endgroup % end raw TeX |
84318 | 8013 \endgroup} |
8014 % | |
8015 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, | |
8016 % try txi-de.tex. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8017 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8018 \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% |
84318 | 8019 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
8020 \ifeof 1 | |
8021 \errhelp = \nolanghelp | |
8022 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | |
8023 \else | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8024 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist |
84318 | 8025 \input txi-#1.tex |
8026 \fi | |
8027 \closein 1 | |
8028 } | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8029 }% end of special _ catcode |
84318 | 8030 % |
8031 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8032 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8033 directory should work if nowhere else does.} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8034 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8035 % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8036 % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8037 % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8038 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8039 % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8040 % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8041 % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8042 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8043 % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8044 % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8045 % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8046 % accented characters problem.) |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8047 % |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8048 \catcode`@=11 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8049 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8050 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8051 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8052 \message{no patterns for #1}% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8053 \else |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8054 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8055 \fi |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8056 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8057 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8058 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8059 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8060 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8061 % Helpers for encodings. |
84318 | 8062 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. |
8063 % | |
8064 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% | |
8065 \count255=128 | |
8066 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8067 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8068 \advance\count255 by 1 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8069 \repeat |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8070 } |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8071 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8072 \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8073 \count255=128 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8074 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8075 \catcode\count255=#1\relax |
84318 | 8076 \advance\count255 by 1 |
8077 \repeat | |
8078 } | |
8079 | |
8080 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters | |
8081 % according to the specified encoding. | |
8082 % | |
8083 \parseargdef\documentencoding{% | |
8084 % Encoding being declared for the document. | |
8085 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% | |
8086 % | |
8087 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able | |
8088 % to compare them with \ifx. | |
8089 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% | |
8090 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% | |
8091 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% | |
8092 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% | |
8093 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% | |
8094 % | |
8095 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii | |
8096 \asciichardefs | |
8097 % | |
8098 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo | |
8099 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
8100 \lattwochardefs | |
8101 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8102 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone |
84318 | 8103 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
8104 \latonechardefs | |
8105 % | |
8106 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine | |
8107 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
8108 \latninechardefs | |
8109 % | |
8110 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight | |
8111 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
8112 \utfeightchardefs | |
8113 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8114 \else |
84318 | 8115 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% |
8116 % | |
8117 \fi % utfeight | |
8118 \fi % latnine | |
8119 \fi % latone | |
8120 \fi % lattwo | |
8121 \fi % ascii | |
8122 } | |
8123 | |
8124 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available | |
8125 % the default font encoding (OT1). | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8126 % |
84318 | 8127 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} |
8128 | |
8129 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. | |
8130 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} | |
8131 | |
8132 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be | |
8133 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of | |
8134 % macros containing the character definitions. | |
8135 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
8136 % | |
8137 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. | |
8138 \def\latonechardefs{% | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8139 \gdef^^a0{~} |
84318 | 8140 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8141 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} |
84318 | 8142 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} |
8143 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} | |
8144 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8145 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} |
84318 | 8146 \gdef^^a7{\S} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8147 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8148 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} |
84318 | 8149 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8150 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} |
84318 | 8151 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8152 \gdef^^ad{\-} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8153 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} |
84318 | 8154 \gdef^^af{\={}} |
8155 % | |
8156 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} | |
8157 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} | |
8158 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} | |
8159 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} | |
8160 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} | |
8161 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} | |
8162 \gdef^^b6{\P} | |
8163 % | |
8164 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} | |
8165 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } | |
8166 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} | |
8167 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} | |
8168 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8169 \gdef^^bb{\guilletright} |
84318 | 8170 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} |
8171 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} | |
8172 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} | |
8173 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} | |
8174 % | |
8175 \gdef^^c0{\`A} | |
8176 \gdef^^c1{\'A} | |
8177 \gdef^^c2{\^A} | |
8178 \gdef^^c3{\~A} | |
8179 \gdef^^c4{\"A} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8180 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} |
84318 | 8181 \gdef^^c6{\AE} |
8182 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} | |
8183 \gdef^^c8{\`E} | |
8184 \gdef^^c9{\'E} | |
8185 \gdef^^ca{\^E} | |
8186 \gdef^^cb{\"E} | |
8187 \gdef^^cc{\`I} | |
8188 \gdef^^cd{\'I} | |
8189 \gdef^^ce{\^I} | |
8190 \gdef^^cf{\"I} | |
8191 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8192 \gdef^^d0{\DH} |
84318 | 8193 \gdef^^d1{\~N} |
8194 \gdef^^d2{\`O} | |
8195 \gdef^^d3{\'O} | |
8196 \gdef^^d4{\^O} | |
8197 \gdef^^d5{\~O} | |
8198 \gdef^^d6{\"O} | |
8199 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} | |
8200 \gdef^^d8{\O} | |
8201 \gdef^^d9{\`U} | |
8202 \gdef^^da{\'U} | |
8203 \gdef^^db{\^U} | |
8204 \gdef^^dc{\"U} | |
8205 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8206 \gdef^^de{\TH} |
84318 | 8207 \gdef^^df{\ss} |
8208 % | |
8209 \gdef^^e0{\`a} | |
8210 \gdef^^e1{\'a} | |
8211 \gdef^^e2{\^a} | |
8212 \gdef^^e3{\~a} | |
8213 \gdef^^e4{\"a} | |
8214 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} | |
8215 \gdef^^e6{\ae} | |
8216 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} | |
8217 \gdef^^e8{\`e} | |
8218 \gdef^^e9{\'e} | |
8219 \gdef^^ea{\^e} | |
8220 \gdef^^eb{\"e} | |
8221 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} | |
8222 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} | |
8223 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} | |
8224 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} | |
8225 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8226 \gdef^^f0{\dh} |
84318 | 8227 \gdef^^f1{\~n} |
8228 \gdef^^f2{\`o} | |
8229 \gdef^^f3{\'o} | |
8230 \gdef^^f4{\^o} | |
8231 \gdef^^f5{\~o} | |
8232 \gdef^^f6{\"o} | |
8233 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} | |
8234 \gdef^^f8{\o} | |
8235 \gdef^^f9{\`u} | |
8236 \gdef^^fa{\'u} | |
8237 \gdef^^fb{\^u} | |
8238 \gdef^^fc{\"u} | |
8239 \gdef^^fd{\'y} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8240 \gdef^^fe{\th} |
84318 | 8241 \gdef^^ff{\"y} |
8242 } | |
8243 | |
8244 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. | |
8245 \def\latninechardefs{% | |
8246 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. | |
8247 \latonechardefs | |
8248 % | |
8249 \gdef^^a4{\euro} | |
8250 \gdef^^a6{\v S} | |
8251 \gdef^^a8{\v s} | |
8252 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} | |
8253 \gdef^^b8{\v z} | |
8254 \gdef^^bc{\OE} | |
8255 \gdef^^bd{\oe} | |
8256 \gdef^^be{\"Y} | |
8257 } | |
8258 | |
8259 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. | |
8260 \def\lattwochardefs{% | |
8261 \gdef^^a0{~} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8262 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} |
84318 | 8263 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} |
8264 \gdef^^a3{\L} | |
8265 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} | |
8266 \gdef^^a5{\v L} | |
8267 \gdef^^a6{\'S} | |
8268 \gdef^^a7{\S} | |
8269 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} | |
8270 \gdef^^a9{\v S} | |
8271 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} | |
8272 \gdef^^ab{\v T} | |
8273 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} | |
8274 \gdef^^ad{\-} | |
8275 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} | |
8276 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} | |
8277 % | |
8278 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8279 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8280 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} |
84318 | 8281 \gdef^^b3{\l} |
8282 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} | |
8283 \gdef^^b5{\v l} | |
8284 \gdef^^b6{\'s} | |
8285 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} | |
8286 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } | |
8287 \gdef^^b9{\v s} | |
8288 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} | |
8289 \gdef^^bb{\v t} | |
8290 \gdef^^bc{\'z} | |
8291 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} | |
8292 \gdef^^be{\v z} | |
8293 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} | |
8294 % | |
8295 \gdef^^c0{\'R} | |
8296 \gdef^^c1{\'A} | |
8297 \gdef^^c2{\^A} | |
8298 \gdef^^c3{\u A} | |
8299 \gdef^^c4{\"A} | |
8300 \gdef^^c5{\'L} | |
8301 \gdef^^c6{\'C} | |
8302 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} | |
8303 \gdef^^c8{\v C} | |
8304 \gdef^^c9{\'E} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8305 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} |
84318 | 8306 \gdef^^cb{\"E} |
8307 \gdef^^cc{\v E} | |
8308 \gdef^^cd{\'I} | |
8309 \gdef^^ce{\^I} | |
8310 \gdef^^cf{\v D} | |
8311 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8312 \gdef^^d0{\DH} |
84318 | 8313 \gdef^^d1{\'N} |
8314 \gdef^^d2{\v N} | |
8315 \gdef^^d3{\'O} | |
8316 \gdef^^d4{\^O} | |
8317 \gdef^^d5{\H O} | |
8318 \gdef^^d6{\"O} | |
8319 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} | |
8320 \gdef^^d8{\v R} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8321 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} |
84318 | 8322 \gdef^^da{\'U} |
8323 \gdef^^db{\H U} | |
8324 \gdef^^dc{\"U} | |
8325 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} | |
8326 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} | |
8327 \gdef^^df{\ss} | |
8328 % | |
8329 \gdef^^e0{\'r} | |
8330 \gdef^^e1{\'a} | |
8331 \gdef^^e2{\^a} | |
8332 \gdef^^e3{\u a} | |
8333 \gdef^^e4{\"a} | |
8334 \gdef^^e5{\'l} | |
8335 \gdef^^e6{\'c} | |
8336 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} | |
8337 \gdef^^e8{\v c} | |
8338 \gdef^^e9{\'e} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8339 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} |
84318 | 8340 \gdef^^eb{\"e} |
8341 \gdef^^ec{\v e} | |
8342 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} | |
8343 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} | |
8344 \gdef^^ef{\v d} | |
8345 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8346 \gdef^^f0{\dh} |
84318 | 8347 \gdef^^f1{\'n} |
8348 \gdef^^f2{\v n} | |
8349 \gdef^^f3{\'o} | |
8350 \gdef^^f4{\^o} | |
8351 \gdef^^f5{\H o} | |
8352 \gdef^^f6{\"o} | |
8353 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} | |
8354 \gdef^^f8{\v r} | |
8355 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} | |
8356 \gdef^^fa{\'u} | |
8357 \gdef^^fb{\H u} | |
8358 \gdef^^fc{\"u} | |
8359 \gdef^^fd{\'y} | |
8360 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} | |
8361 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} | |
8362 } | |
8363 | |
8364 % UTF-8 character definitions. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8365 % |
84318 | 8366 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some |
8367 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by | |
8368 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8369 % |
84318 | 8370 \newcount\countUTFx |
8371 \newcount\countUTFy | |
8372 \newcount\countUTFz | |
8373 | |
8374 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter | |
8375 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} | |
8376 % | |
8377 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter | |
8378 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} | |
8379 % | |
8380 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter | |
8381 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} | |
8382 | |
8383 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% | |
8384 \ifx #1\relax | |
8385 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% | |
8386 \else | |
8387 \expandafter #1% | |
8388 \fi | |
8389 } | |
8390 | |
8391 \begingroup | |
8392 \catcode`\~13 | |
8393 \catcode`\"12 | |
8394 | |
8395 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% | |
8396 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active | |
8397 \uccode`\~\countUTFx | |
8398 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% | |
8399 \advance\countUTFx by 1 | |
8400 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy | |
8401 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop | |
8402 \fi} | |
8403 | |
8404 \countUTFx = "C2 | |
8405 \countUTFy = "E0 | |
8406 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | |
8407 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} | |
8408 \UTFviiiLoop | |
8409 | |
8410 \countUTFx = "E0 | |
8411 \countUTFy = "F0 | |
8412 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | |
8413 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} | |
8414 \UTFviiiLoop | |
8415 | |
8416 \countUTFx = "F0 | |
8417 \countUTFy = "F4 | |
8418 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | |
8419 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} | |
8420 \UTFviiiLoop | |
8421 \endgroup | |
8422 | |
8423 \begingroup | |
8424 \catcode`\"=12 | |
8425 \catcode`\<=12 | |
8426 \catcode`\.=12 | |
8427 \catcode`\,=12 | |
8428 \catcode`\;=12 | |
8429 \catcode`\!=12 | |
8430 \catcode`\~=13 | |
8431 | |
8432 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% | |
8433 \countUTFz = "#1\relax | |
8434 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% | |
8435 \begingroup | |
8436 \parseXMLCharref | |
8437 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% | |
8438 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% | |
8439 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% | |
8440 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% | |
8441 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% | |
8442 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% | |
8443 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | |
8444 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | |
8445 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% | |
8446 \endgroup} | |
8447 | |
8448 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% | |
8449 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax | |
8450 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
8451 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% | |
8452 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax | |
8453 \parseUTFviiiA,% | |
8454 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% | |
8455 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax | |
8456 \parseUTFviiiA;% | |
8457 \parseUTFviiiA,% | |
8458 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% | |
8459 \else | |
8460 \parseUTFviiiA;% | |
8461 \parseUTFviiiA,% | |
8462 \parseUTFviiiA!% | |
8463 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% | |
8464 \fi\fi\fi | |
8465 } | |
8466 | |
8467 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% | |
8468 \countUTFx = \countUTFz | |
8469 \divide\countUTFz by 64 | |
8470 \countUTFy = \countUTFz | |
8471 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 | |
8472 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz | |
8473 \advance\countUTFx by 128 | |
8474 \uccode `#1\countUTFx | |
8475 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} | |
8476 | |
8477 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% | |
8478 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax | |
8479 \uccode `#3\countUTFz | |
8480 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} | |
8481 \endgroup | |
8482 | |
8483 \def\utfeightchardefs{% | |
8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} | |
8485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} | |
8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} | |
8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} | |
8488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} | |
8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} |
84318 | 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} |
8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} | |
8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} | |
8494 | |
8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} | |
8496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} | |
8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} | |
8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} |
84318 | 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} |
8501 | |
8502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} | |
8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} | |
8504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} | |
8505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} | |
8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} | |
8507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} | |
8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} | |
8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} | |
8510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} | |
8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} | |
8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} | |
8513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} | |
8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} | |
8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} | |
8516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} | |
8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} | |
8518 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} |
84318 | 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} |
8521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} | |
8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} | |
8523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} | |
8524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} | |
8525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} | |
8526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} | |
8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} | |
8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} | |
8529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} | |
8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} | |
8531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} |
84318 | 8533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} |
8534 | |
8535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} | |
8536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} | |
8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} | |
8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} | |
8539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} | |
8540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} | |
8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} | |
8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} | |
8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} | |
8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} | |
8545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} | |
8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} | |
8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} | |
8548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} | |
8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} | |
8550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} | |
8551 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} |
84318 | 8553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} |
8554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} | |
8555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} | |
8556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} | |
8557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} | |
8558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} | |
8559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} | |
8560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} | |
8561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} | |
8562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} | |
8563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} | |
8564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} |
84318 | 8566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} |
8567 | |
8568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} | |
8569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} | |
8570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} | |
8571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} |
84318 | 8574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} |
8575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} | |
8576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} | |
8577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} |
84318 | 8580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} |
8581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} | |
8582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} | |
8583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} | |
8584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} | |
8585 | |
8586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} | |
8587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} | |
8588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} | |
8589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} | |
8590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} | |
8591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} | |
8592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} | |
8593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} | |
8594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} | |
8595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} | |
8596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} | |
8597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} | |
8598 | |
8599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} | |
8600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} | |
8601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} | |
8602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} | |
8603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} | |
8604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} | |
8605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} | |
8606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} | |
8607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} | |
8608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} | |
8609 | |
8610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} | |
8611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} | |
8612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} | |
8613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} | |
8614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} | |
8615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} | |
8616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} | |
8617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} | |
8618 | |
8619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} | |
8620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} | |
8621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} | |
8622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} | |
8623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} | |
8624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} | |
8625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} | |
8626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} | |
8627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} | |
8628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} | |
8629 | |
8630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} | |
8631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} | |
8632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} | |
8633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} | |
8634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} | |
8635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} | |
8636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} | |
8637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} | |
8638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} | |
8639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} | |
8640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} | |
8641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} | |
8642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} | |
8643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} | |
8644 | |
8645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} | |
8646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} | |
8647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} | |
8648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} | |
8649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} | |
8650 | |
8651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} | |
8652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} | |
8653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} | |
8654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} | |
8655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} | |
8656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} | |
8657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} | |
8658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} | |
8659 | |
8660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} | |
8661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} | |
8662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} | |
8663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} | |
8664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} | |
8665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} | |
8666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} | |
8667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} | |
8668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} | |
8669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} | |
8670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} | |
8671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} | |
8672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} | |
8673 | |
8674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} | |
8675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} | |
8676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} | |
8677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} | |
8678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} | |
8679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} | |
8680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} | |
8681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} | |
8682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} | |
8683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} | |
8684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} | |
8685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} | |
8686 | |
8687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} | |
8688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} | |
8689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} | |
8690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} | |
8691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} | |
8692 | |
8693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} | |
8694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} | |
8695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} | |
8696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} | |
8697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} | |
8698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} | |
8699 | |
8700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} | |
8701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} | |
8702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} | |
8703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} | |
8704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} | |
8705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} | |
8706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} | |
8707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} | |
8708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} | |
8709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} | |
8710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} | |
8711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} | |
8712 | |
8713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} | |
8714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} | |
8715 | |
8716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} | |
8717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} | |
8718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} | |
8719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} | |
8720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} | |
8721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} | |
8722 | |
8723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} | |
8724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} | |
8725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} | |
8726 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8728 |
84318 | 8729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} |
8730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} | |
8731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} | |
8732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} | |
8733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} | |
8734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} | |
8735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} | |
8736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} | |
8737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} | |
8738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} | |
8739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} | |
8740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} | |
8741 | |
8742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} | |
8743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} | |
8744 | |
8745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} | |
8746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} | |
8747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} | |
8748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} | |
8749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} | |
8750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} | |
8751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} | |
8752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} | |
8753 | |
8754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} | |
8755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} | |
8756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} | |
8757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} | |
8758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} | |
8759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} | |
8760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} | |
8761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} | |
8762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} | |
8763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} | |
8764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} | |
8765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} | |
8766 | |
8767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} | |
8768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} | |
8769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} | |
8770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} | |
8771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} | |
8772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} | |
8773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} | |
8774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} | |
8775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} | |
8776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} | |
8777 | |
8778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} | |
8779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} | |
8780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} | |
8781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} | |
8782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} | |
8783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} | |
8784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} | |
8785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} | |
8786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} | |
8787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} | |
8788 | |
8789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} | |
8790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} | |
8791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} | |
8792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} | |
8793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} | |
8794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} | |
8795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} | |
8796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} | |
8797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} | |
8798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} | |
8799 | |
8800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} | |
8801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} | |
8802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} | |
8803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} | |
8804 | |
8805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} | |
8806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} | |
8807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} | |
8808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} | |
8809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} | |
8810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} | |
8811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} | |
8812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} | |
8813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} | |
8814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} | |
8815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} | |
8816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} | |
8817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} | |
8818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} | |
8819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} | |
8820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} | |
8821 | |
8822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} | |
8823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} | |
8824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} | |
8825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} | |
8826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} | |
8827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} | |
8828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} | |
8829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} | |
8830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} | |
8831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} | |
8832 | |
8833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} | |
8834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} | |
8835 | |
8836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} | |
8837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} | |
8838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} | |
8839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} | |
8840 | |
8841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} | |
8842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} | |
8843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} | |
8844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} | |
8845 | |
8846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} | |
8847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} | |
8848 | |
8849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} | |
8850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} | |
8851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} | |
8852 | |
8853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} | |
8854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} | |
8855 | |
8856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} | |
8857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} |
84318 | 8864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} |
8865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} |
84318 | 8868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} |
8869 | |
8870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} | |
8871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} | |
8872 | |
8873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} | |
8874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} | |
8875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} | |
8876 }% end of \utfeightchardefs | |
8877 | |
8878 | |
8879 % US-ASCII character definitions. | |
8880 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done | |
8881 \relax | |
8882 } | |
8883 | |
8884 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with | |
8885 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a | |
8886 % document encoding. | |
8887 % | |
8888 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other | |
8889 | |
8890 | |
8891 \message{formatting,} | |
8892 | |
8893 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | |
8894 | |
8895 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
8896 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | |
8897 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | |
8898 | |
8899 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | |
8900 \vbadness = 10000 | |
8901 | |
8902 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | |
8903 \hbadness = 2000 | |
8904 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8905 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. |
84318 | 8906 \widowpenalty=10000 |
8907 \clubpenalty=10000 | |
8908 | |
8909 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | |
8910 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of | |
8911 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | |
8912 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. | |
8913 % | |
8914 \def\setemergencystretch{% | |
8915 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | |
8916 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | |
8917 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | |
8918 \else | |
8919 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | |
8920 \fi | |
8921 } | |
8922 | |
8923 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; | |
8924 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; | |
8925 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. | |
8926 % | |
8927 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | |
8928 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. | |
8929 % | |
8930 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | |
8931 \voffset = #3\relax | |
8932 \topskip = #6\relax | |
8933 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
8934 % | |
8935 \vsize = #1\relax | |
8936 \advance\vsize by \topskip | |
8937 \outervsize = \vsize | |
8938 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | |
8939 \pageheight = \vsize | |
8940 % | |
8941 \hsize = #2\relax | |
8942 \outerhsize = \hsize | |
8943 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | |
8944 \pagewidth = \hsize | |
8945 % | |
8946 \normaloffset = #4\relax | |
8947 \bindingoffset = #5\relax | |
8948 % | |
8949 \ifpdf | |
8950 \pdfpageheight #7\relax | |
8951 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8952 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8953 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. |
84318 | 8954 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in |
8955 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in | |
8956 \fi | |
8957 % | |
8958 \setleading{\textleading} | |
8959 % | |
8960 \parindent = \defaultparindent | |
8961 \setemergencystretch | |
8962 } | |
8963 | |
8964 % @letterpaper (the default). | |
8965 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8966 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
8967 \textleading = 13.2pt | |
8968 % | |
8969 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
8970 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines |
84318 | 8971 {\voffset}{.25in}% |
8972 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | |
8973 {11in}{8.5in}% | |
8974 }} | |
8975 | |
8976 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. | |
8977 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8978 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | |
8979 \textleading = 12pt | |
8980 % | |
8981 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% | |
8982 {-.2in}{0in}% | |
8983 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | |
8984 {9.25in}{7in}% | |
8985 % | |
8986 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | |
8987 \tolerance = 700 | |
8988 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
8989 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
8990 \defbodyindent = .5cm | |
8991 }} | |
8992 | |
8993 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. | |
8994 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) | |
8995 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8996 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt | |
8997 \textleading = 12pt | |
8998 % | |
8999 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% | |
9000 {-.2in}{-.4in}% | |
9001 {0pt}{14pt}% | |
9002 {9in}{6in}% | |
9003 % | |
9004 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in | |
9005 \tolerance = 700 | |
9006 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
9007 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
9008 \defbodyindent = .4cm | |
9009 }} | |
9010 | |
9011 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | |
9012 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
9013 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
9014 \textleading = 13.2pt | |
9015 % | |
9016 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 | |
9017 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | |
9018 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | |
9019 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then | |
9020 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in | |
9021 % your texinfo source file like this: | |
9022 % @tex | |
9023 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | |
9024 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | |
9025 % @end tex | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9026 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines |
84318 | 9027 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% |
9028 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
9029 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
9030 % | |
9031 \tolerance = 700 | |
9032 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
9033 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
9034 \defbodyindent = 5mm | |
9035 }} | |
9036 | |
9037 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. | |
9038 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | |
9039 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | |
9040 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
9041 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | |
9042 \textleading = 12.5pt | |
9043 % | |
9044 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% | |
9045 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
9046 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | |
9047 {210mm}{148mm}% | |
9048 % | |
9049 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | |
9050 \tolerance = 800 | |
9051 \hfuzz = 1.2pt | |
9052 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
9053 \defbodyindent = 2mm | |
9054 \tableindent = 12mm | |
9055 }} | |
9056 | |
9057 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. | |
9058 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
9059 \afourpaper | |
9060 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% | |
9061 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | |
9062 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
9063 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
9064 % | |
9065 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. | |
9066 \globaldefs = 0 | |
9067 }} | |
9068 | |
9069 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. | |
9070 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
9071 \afourpaper | |
9072 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% | |
9073 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | |
9074 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
9075 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
9076 \globaldefs = 0 | |
9077 }} | |
9078 | |
9079 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | |
9080 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | |
9081 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | |
9082 % | |
9083 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} | |
9084 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% | |
9085 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | |
9086 \globaldefs = 1 | |
9087 % | |
9088 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
9089 \setleading{\textleading}% | |
9090 % | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9091 \dimen0 = #1\relax |
84318 | 9092 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset |
9093 % | |
9094 \dimen2 = \hsize | |
9095 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | |
9096 % | |
9097 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | |
9098 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | |
9099 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
9100 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | |
9101 }} | |
9102 | |
9103 % Set default to letter. | |
9104 % | |
9105 \letterpaper | |
9106 | |
9107 | |
9108 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | |
9109 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9110 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9111 \catcode`\^^? = 14 |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9112 |
84318 | 9113 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
9114 \catcode`\"=\other | |
9115 \catcode`\~=\other | |
9116 \catcode`\^=\other | |
9117 \catcode`\_=\other | |
9118 \catcode`\|=\other | |
9119 \catcode`\<=\other | |
9120 \catcode`\>=\other | |
9121 \catcode`\+=\other | |
9122 \catcode`\$=\other | |
9123 \def\normaldoublequote{"} | |
9124 \def\normaltilde{~} | |
9125 \def\normalcaret{^} | |
9126 \def\normalunderscore{_} | |
9127 \def\normalverticalbar{|} | |
9128 \def\normalless{<} | |
9129 \def\normalgreater{>} | |
9130 \def\normalplus{+} | |
9131 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix | |
9132 | |
9133 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt | |
9134 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | |
9135 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. | |
9136 % | |
9137 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | |
9138 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | |
9139 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | |
9140 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | |
9141 % | |
9142 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
9143 | |
9144 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches | |
9145 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | |
9146 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | |
9147 % this is not a problem. | |
9148 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
9149 | |
9150 % Turn off all special characters except @ | |
9151 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | |
9152 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | |
9153 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | |
9154 | |
9155 \catcode`\"=\active | |
9156 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | |
9157 \let"=\activedoublequote | |
9158 \catcode`\~=\active | |
9159 \def~{{\tt\char126}} | |
9160 \chardef\hat=`\^ | |
9161 \catcode`\^=\active | |
9162 \def^{{\tt \hat}} | |
9163 | |
9164 \catcode`\_=\active | |
9165 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | |
9166 \let\realunder=_ | |
9167 % Subroutine for the previous macro. | |
9168 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } | |
9169 | |
9170 \catcode`\|=\active | |
9171 \def|{{\tt\char124}} | |
9172 \chardef \less=`\< | |
9173 \catcode`\<=\active | |
9174 \def<{{\tt \less}} | |
9175 \chardef \gtr=`\> | |
9176 \catcode`\>=\active | |
9177 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | |
9178 \catcode`\+=\active | |
9179 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | |
9180 \catcode`\$=\active | |
9181 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix | |
9182 | |
9183 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | |
9184 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | |
9185 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | |
9186 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | |
9187 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | |
9188 | |
9189 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after | |
9190 % parsing them. | |
9191 \def\turnoffactive{% | |
9192 \normalturnoffactive | |
9193 \otherbackslash | |
9194 } | |
9195 | |
9196 \catcode`\@=0 | |
9197 | |
9198 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, | |
9199 % as in \char`\\. | |
9200 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | |
9201 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work | |
9202 | |
9203 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and | |
9204 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). | |
9205 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} | |
9206 | |
9207 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash | |
9208 % in fixed width font. | |
9209 \catcode`\\=\active | |
9210 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} | |
9211 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: | |
9212 % @let \ = @normalbackslash | |
9213 | |
9214 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. | |
9215 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | |
9216 % catcode other. | |
9217 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} | |
9218 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | |
9219 | |
9220 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | |
9221 % the literal character `\'. | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9222 % |
84318 | 9223 @def@normalturnoffactive{% |
9224 @let\=@normalbackslash | |
9225 @let"=@normaldoublequote | |
9226 @let~=@normaltilde | |
9227 @let^=@normalcaret | |
9228 @let_=@normalunderscore | |
9229 @let|=@normalverticalbar | |
9230 @let<=@normalless | |
9231 @let>=@normalgreater | |
9232 @let+=@normalplus | |
9233 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9234 @markupsetuplqdefault |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9235 @markupsetuprqdefault |
84318 | 9236 @unsepspaces |
9237 } | |
9238 | |
9239 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | |
9240 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | |
9241 @otherifyactive | |
9242 | |
9243 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | |
9244 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | |
9245 % a backslash. | |
9246 % | |
9247 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | |
9248 @global@let\ = @eatinput | |
9249 | |
9250 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | |
9251 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix | |
9252 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. | |
9253 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input | |
9254 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. | |
9255 % | |
9256 @gdef@fixbackslash{% | |
9257 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | |
9258 @catcode`+=@active | |
9259 @catcode`@_=@active | |
9260 } | |
9261 | |
9262 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | |
9263 @escapechar = `@@ | |
9264 | |
9265 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. | |
9266 @catcode`@& = @other | |
9267 @catcode`@# = @other | |
9268 @catcode`@% = @other | |
9269 | |
105797
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9270 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9271 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9272 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9273 @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9274 @catcode`@'=@active |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9275 @catcode`@`=@active |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9276 @markupsetuplqdefault |
881d56e9c3b5
Update to version 2009-08-14.15 from ftp://tug.org/tex/.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
9277 @markupsetuprqdefault |
84318 | 9278 |
9279 @c Local variables: | |
9280 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | |
9281 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | |
9282 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | |
9283 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | |
9284 @c time-stamp-end: "}" | |
9285 @c End: | |
9286 | |
9287 @c vim:sw=2: | |
9288 | |
9289 @ignore | |
9290 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 | |
9291 @end ignore |